Get rid of the global "base_target" and use "find_target_beneath"
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
4 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @syncodeindex ky cp
7 @c man begin INCLUDE
8 @include configdoc.texi
9 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
10 @include bfdver.texi
11 @c man end
12
13 @c @smallbook
14
15 @macro gcctabopt{body}
16 @code{\body\}
17 @end macro
18
19 @c man begin NAME
20 @ifset man
21 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
22 @set UsesEnvVars
23 @set GENERIC
24 @set ARM
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set I960
28 @set M68HC11
29 @set M68K
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set POWERPC
33 @set POWERPC64
34 @set Renesas
35 @set SPU
36 @set TICOFF
37 @set WIN32
38 @set XTENSA
39 @end ifset
40 @c man end
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @format
44 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 @end format
48 @end ifinfo
49
50 @copying
51 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54 @end ifset
55 version @value{VERSION}.
56
57 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
58 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
96 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68HC11
148 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset SPU
160 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset TICOFF
163 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset WIN32
166 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset XTENSA
169 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170 @end ifset
171 @end ifclear
172 @ifclear SingleFormat
173 * BFD:: BFD
174 @end ifclear
175 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
179 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
180 * LD Index:: LD Index
181 @end menu
182 @end ifnottex
183
184 @node Overview
185 @chapter Overview
186
187 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188 @cindex what is this?
189
190 @ifset man
191 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
192 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
193 @c man end
194
195 @c man begin SEEALSO
196 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198 @file{ld}.
199 @c man end
200 @end ifset
201
202 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
204 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
205 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
206 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
207
208 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
209 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
212 @ifset man
213 @c For the man only
214 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
215 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
217 @end ifset
218
219 @ifclear SingleFormat
220 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
222 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225 @end ifclear
226
227 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
230 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
231 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
233 @c man end
234
235 @node Invocation
236 @chapter Invocation
237
238 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
240 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
241 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242 you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
244 @c man end
245
246 @ifset UsesEnvVars
247 @menu
248 * Options:: Command Line Options
249 * Environment:: Environment Variables
250 @end menu
251
252 @node Options
253 @section Command Line Options
254 @end ifset
255
256 @cindex command line
257 @cindex options
258
259 @c man begin OPTIONS
260
261 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263 @cindex standard Unix system
264 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
265 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266 link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268 @smallexample
269 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270 @end smallexample
271
272 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
273 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
277 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
278 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
283 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285 noted in the descriptions below.
286
287 @cindex object files
288 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291 an option and its argument.
292
293 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297 message @samp{No input files}.
298
299 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
300 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
305 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
310
311 For options whose names are a single letter,
312 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314 option that requires them.
315
316 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
317 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
318 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
319 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
320 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
321 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323 output.
324
325 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330 accepted.
331
332 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
334 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335 compiler driver) like this:
336
337 @smallexample
338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
339 @end smallexample
340
341 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
342 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349 @smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351 @end smallexample
352
353 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354 linker:
355
356 @table @gcctabopt
357 @include at-file.texi
358
359 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
360 @item -a @var{keyword}
361 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367 @ifset I960
368 @cindex architectures
369 @kindex -A @var{arch}
370 @item -A @var{architecture}
371 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
373 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
375 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
377 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
378 family}, for details.
379
380 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
381 other architecture families.
382 @end ifset
383
384 @ifclear SingleFormat
385 @cindex binary input format
386 @kindex -b @var{format}
387 @kindex --format=@var{format}
388 @cindex input format
389 @cindex input format
390 @item -b @var{input-format}
391 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
392 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
394 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
395 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
396 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
397 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
398 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402 @xref{BFD}.
403
404 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406 linking object files of different formats), by including
407 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
408 particular format.
409
410 The default format is taken from the environment variable
411 @code{GNUTARGET}.
412 @ifset UsesEnvVars
413 @xref{Environment}.
414 @end ifset
415 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
416 @code{TARGET};
417 @ifclear man
418 see @ref{Format Commands}.
419 @end ifclear
420 @end ifclear
421
422 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424 @cindex compatibility, MRI
425 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
427 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
428 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
429 @ifclear man
430 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431 @end ifclear
432 @ifset man
433 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434 @end ifset
435 Introduce MRI script files with
436 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
437 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
439 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441 @cindex common allocation
442 @kindex -d
443 @kindex -dc
444 @kindex -dp
445 @item -d
446 @itemx -dc
447 @itemx -dp
448 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454 @cindex entry point, from command line
455 @kindex -e @var{entry}
456 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
457 @item -e @var{entry}
458 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
467 @kindex --exclude-libs
468 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
470 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
471 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476 be treated as hidden.
477
478 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489 regardless of this option.
490
491 @cindex dynamic symbol table
492 @kindex -E
493 @kindex --export-dynamic
494 @item -E
495 @itemx --export-dynamic
496 When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
497 dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
498 which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
499
500 If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
501 contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
502 mentioned in the link.
503
504 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
505 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
506 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
507 linking the program itself.
508
509 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
510 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
511 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
512
513 @ifclear SingleFormat
514 @cindex big-endian objects
515 @cindex endianness
516 @kindex -EB
517 @item -EB
518 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
519
520 @cindex little-endian objects
521 @kindex -EL
522 @item -EL
523 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
524 @end ifclear
525
526 @kindex -f @var{name}
527 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
528 @item -f @var{name}
529 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
530 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
531 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
532 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
533 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
534
535 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
536 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
537 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
538 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
539 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
540 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
541 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
542 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
543 machine specific performance.
544
545 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
546 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
547
548 @kindex -F @var{name}
549 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
550 @item -F @var{name}
551 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
552 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
553 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
554 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
555 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
556
557 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
558 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
559 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
560 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
561 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
562 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
563 @var{name}.
564
565 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
566 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
567 object files.
568 @ifclear SingleFormat
569 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
570 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
571 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
572 environment variable.
573 @end ifclear
574 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
575 creating an ELF shared object.
576
577 @cindex finalization function
578 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
579 @item -fini=@var{name}
580 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
581 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
582 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
583 the function to call.
584
585 @kindex -g
586 @item -g
587 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
588
589 @kindex -G @var{value}
590 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
591 @cindex object size
592 @item -G @var{value}
593 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
594 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
595 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
596 MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
597 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
598
599 @cindex runtime library name
600 @kindex -h @var{name}
601 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
602 @item -h @var{name}
603 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
604 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
605 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
606 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
607 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
608 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
609
610 @kindex -i
611 @cindex incremental link
612 @item -i
613 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
614
615 @cindex initialization function
616 @kindex -init=@var{name}
617 @item -init=@var{name}
618 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
619 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
620 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
621 function to call.
622
623 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
624 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
625 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
626 @item -l @var{namespec}
627 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
628 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
629 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
630 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
631 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
632 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
633
634 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
635 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
636 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
637 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
638 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
639 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
640 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
641 @var{filename}.
642
643 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
644 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
645 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
646 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
647 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
648 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
649
650 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
651 archives multiple times.
652
653 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
654
655 @ifset GENERIC
656 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
657 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
658 behaviour of the AIX linker.
659 @end ifset
660
661 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
662 @kindex -L @var{dir}
663 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
664 @item -L @var{searchdir}
665 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
666 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
667 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
668 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
669 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
670 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
671 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
672 order in which the options appear.
673
674 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
675 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
676
677 @ifset UsesEnvVars
678 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
679 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
680 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
681 @end ifset
682
683 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
684 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
685 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
686
687 @cindex emulation
688 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
689 @item -m @var{emulation}
690 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
691 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
692
693 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
694 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
695
696 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
697 configured.
698
699 @cindex link map
700 @kindex -M
701 @kindex --print-map
702 @item -M
703 @itemx --print-map
704 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
705 information about the link, including the following:
706
707 @itemize @bullet
708 @item
709 Where object files are mapped into memory.
710 @item
711 How common symbols are allocated.
712 @item
713 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
714 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
715 @item
716 The values assigned to symbols.
717
718 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
719 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
720 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
721 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
722 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
723 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
724 linker script containing:
725
726 @smallexample
727 foo = 1
728 foo = foo * 4
729 foo = foo + 8
730 @end smallexample
731
732 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
733 option is used:
734
735 @smallexample
736 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
737 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
738 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
739 @end smallexample
740
741 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
742 scripts.
743 @end itemize
744
745 @kindex -n
746 @cindex read-only text
747 @cindex NMAGIC
748 @kindex --nmagic
749 @item -n
750 @itemx --nmagic
751 Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
752 @code{NMAGIC} if possible.
753
754 @kindex -N
755 @kindex --omagic
756 @cindex read/write from cmd line
757 @cindex OMAGIC
758 @item -N
759 @itemx --omagic
760 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
761 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
762 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
763 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
764 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
765 specification published by Microsoft.
766
767 @kindex --no-omagic
768 @cindex OMAGIC
769 @item --no-omagic
770 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
771 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
772 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
773 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
774
775 @kindex -o @var{output}
776 @kindex --output=@var{output}
777 @cindex naming the output file
778 @item -o @var{output}
779 @itemx --output=@var{output}
780 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
781 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
782 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
783
784 @kindex -O @var{level}
785 @cindex generating optimized output
786 @item -O @var{level}
787 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
788 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
789 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
790 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
791 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
792 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
793 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
794
795 @kindex -q
796 @kindex --emit-relocs
797 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
798 @item -q
799 @itemx --emit-relocs
800 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
801 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
802 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
803 in larger executables.
804
805 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
806
807 @kindex --force-dynamic
808 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
809 @item --force-dynamic
810 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
811 to VxWorks targets.
812
813 @cindex partial link
814 @cindex relocatable output
815 @kindex -r
816 @kindex --relocatable
817 @item -r
818 @itemx --relocatable
819 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
820 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
821 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
822 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
823 @code{OMAGIC}.
824 @c ; see @option{-N}.
825 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
826 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
827 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
828
829 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
830 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
831 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
832 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
833 with input files in other formats at all.
834
835 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
836
837 @kindex -R @var{file}
838 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
839 @cindex symbol-only input
840 @item -R @var{filename}
841 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
842 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
843 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
844 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
845 programs. You may use this option more than once.
846
847 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
848 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
849 the @option{-rpath} option.
850
851 @kindex -s
852 @kindex --strip-all
853 @cindex strip all symbols
854 @item -s
855 @itemx --strip-all
856 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
857
858 @kindex -S
859 @kindex --strip-debug
860 @cindex strip debugger symbols
861 @item -S
862 @itemx --strip-debug
863 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
864
865 @kindex -t
866 @kindex --trace
867 @cindex input files, displaying
868 @item -t
869 @itemx --trace
870 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
871
872 @kindex -T @var{script}
873 @kindex --script=@var{script}
874 @cindex script files
875 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
876 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
877 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
878 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
879 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
880 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
881 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
882 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
883 options accumulate.
884
885 @kindex -dT @var{script}
886 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
887 @cindex script files
888 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
889 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
890 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
891
892 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
893 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
894 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
895 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
896 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
897 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
898 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
899 @samp{gcc}).
900
901 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
902 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
903 @cindex undefined symbol
904 @item -u @var{symbol}
905 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
906 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
907 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
908 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
909 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
910 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
911
912 @kindex -Ur
913 @cindex constructors
914 @item -Ur
915 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
916 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
917 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
918 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
919 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
920 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
921 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
922 @samp{-r} for the others.
923
924 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
925 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
926 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
927 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
928 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
929 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
930 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
931 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
932 in a linker script.
933
934 @kindex -v
935 @kindex -V
936 @kindex --version
937 @cindex version
938 @item -v
939 @itemx --version
940 @itemx -V
941 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
942 lists the supported emulations.
943
944 @kindex -x
945 @kindex --discard-all
946 @cindex deleting local symbols
947 @item -x
948 @itemx --discard-all
949 Delete all local symbols.
950
951 @kindex -X
952 @kindex --discard-locals
953 @cindex local symbols, deleting
954 @item -X
955 @itemx --discard-locals
956 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
957 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
958 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
959
960 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
961 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
962 @cindex symbol tracing
963 @item -y @var{symbol}
964 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
965 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
966 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
967 to prepend an underscore.
968
969 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
970 don't know where the reference is coming from.
971
972 @kindex -Y @var{path}
973 @item -Y @var{path}
974 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
975 for Solaris compatibility.
976
977 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
978 @item -z @var{keyword}
979 The recognized keywords are:
980 @table @samp
981
982 @item combreloc
983 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
984 lookup caching possible.
985
986 @item defs
987 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
988 shared libraries are still allowed.
989
990 @item execstack
991 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
992
993 @item initfirst
994 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
995 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
996 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
997 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
998 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
999 objects.
1000
1001 @item interpose
1002 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1003 but the primary executable.
1004
1005 @item lazy
1006 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1007 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1008 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1009 Lazy binding is the default.
1010
1011 @item loadfltr
1012 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1013 runtime.
1014
1015 @item muldefs
1016 Allows multiple definitions.
1017
1018 @item nocombreloc
1019 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1020
1021 @item nocopyreloc
1022 Disables production of copy relocs.
1023
1024 @item nodefaultlib
1025 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1026 ignore any default library search paths.
1027
1028 @item nodelete
1029 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1030
1031 @item nodlopen
1032 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1033
1034 @item nodump
1035 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1036
1037 @item noexecstack
1038 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1039
1040 @item norelro
1041 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1042
1043 @item now
1044 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1046 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1047 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1048 first called.
1049
1050 @item origin
1051 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1052
1053 @item relro
1054 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1055
1056 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1057 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1058
1059 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1060 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1061
1062 @end table
1063
1064 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1065
1066 @kindex -(
1067 @cindex groups of archives
1068 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1069 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1070 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1071 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1072
1073 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1074 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1075 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1076 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1077 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1078 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1079 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1080 resolved.
1081
1082 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1083 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1084 more archives.
1085
1086 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1087 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1088 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1089 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1090 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1091 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1092 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1093 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1094 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1095 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1096 restore the old behaviour.
1097
1098 @kindex --as-needed
1099 @kindex --no-as-needed
1100 @item --as-needed
1101 @itemx --no-as-needed
1102 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1103 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1104 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1105 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1106 needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1107 for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1108 which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1109 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1110 linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
1111 @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1112
1113 @kindex --add-needed
1114 @kindex --no-add-needed
1115 @item --add-needed
1116 @itemx --no-add-needed
1117 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1118 DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1119 the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1120 a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1121 @option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1122 for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1123 the default behaviour.
1124
1125 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1126 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1127 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1128
1129 @kindex -Bdynamic
1130 @kindex -dy
1131 @kindex -call_shared
1132 @item -Bdynamic
1133 @itemx -dy
1134 @itemx -call_shared
1135 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1136 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1137 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1138 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1139 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1140 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1141
1142 @kindex -Bgroup
1143 @item -Bgroup
1144 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1145 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1146 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1147 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1148 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1149
1150 @kindex -Bstatic
1151 @kindex -dn
1152 @kindex -non_shared
1153 @kindex -static
1154 @item -Bstatic
1155 @itemx -dn
1156 @itemx -non_shared
1157 @itemx -static
1158 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1159 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1160 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1161 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1162 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1163 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1164 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1165 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1166 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1167 libraries.
1168
1169 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1170 @item -Bsymbolic
1171 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1172 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1173 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1174 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1175 platforms which support shared libraries.
1176
1177 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1178 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1179 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1180 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1181 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1182 libraries.
1183
1184 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1185 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1186 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1187 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1188 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1189 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1190 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1191 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1192 which support shared libraries.
1193
1194 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1195 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1196
1197 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1198 @item --dynamic-list-data
1199 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1200
1201 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1202 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1203 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1204 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1205
1206 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1207 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1208 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1209
1210 @kindex --check-sections
1211 @kindex --no-check-sections
1212 @item --check-sections
1213 @itemx --no-check-sections
1214 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1215 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1216 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1217 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1218 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1219 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1220 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1221 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1222 option.
1223
1224 @cindex cross reference table
1225 @kindex --cref
1226 @item --cref
1227 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1228 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1229 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1230
1231 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1232 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1233 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1234 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1235 definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1236
1237 @cindex common allocation
1238 @kindex --no-define-common
1239 @item --no-define-common
1240 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1241 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1242 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1243
1244 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1245 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1246 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1247 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1248 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1249 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1250 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1251 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1252 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1253 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1254
1255 @cindex symbols, from command line
1256 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1257 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1258 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1259 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1260 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1261 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1262 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1263 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1264 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1265 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1266 Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1267 space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1268 @var{expression}.
1269
1270 @cindex demangling, from command line
1271 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1272 @kindex --no-demangle
1273 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1274 @itemx --no-demangle
1275 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1276 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1277 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1278 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1279 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1280 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1281 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1282 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1283 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1284
1285 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1286 @kindex -I@var{file}
1287 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1288 @item -I@var{file}
1289 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1290 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1291 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1292 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1293 doing.
1294
1295 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1296 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1297 @item --fatal-warnings
1298 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1299 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1300 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1301
1302 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1303 @item --force-exe-suffix
1304 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1305
1306 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1307 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1308 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1309 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1310 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1311 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1312
1313 @kindex --gc-sections
1314 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1315 @cindex garbage collection
1316 @item --gc-sections
1317 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1318 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1319 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1320 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1321 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
1322
1323 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1324 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1325 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1326 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1327 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1328 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1329 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1330 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1331 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1332
1333 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1334 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1335 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1336 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1337
1338 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1339 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1340 @cindex garbage collection
1341 @item --print-gc-sections
1342 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1343 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1344 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1345 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1346 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1347 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1348 line.
1349
1350 @cindex help
1351 @cindex usage
1352 @kindex --help
1353 @item --help
1354 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1355
1356 @kindex --target-help
1357 @item --target-help
1358 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1359
1360 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1361 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1362 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1363 @option{-M} option, above.
1364
1365 @cindex memory usage
1366 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1367 @item --no-keep-memory
1368 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1369 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1370 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1371 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1372 while linking a large executable.
1373
1374 @kindex --no-undefined
1375 @kindex -z defs
1376 @item --no-undefined
1377 @itemx -z defs
1378 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1379 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1380 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1381 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1382 libraries being linked in.
1383
1384 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1385 @kindex -z muldefs
1386 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1387 @itemx -z muldefs
1388 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1389 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1390 first definition will be used.
1391
1392 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1393 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1394 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1395 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1396 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1397 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1398 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1399 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1400 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1401
1402 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1403 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1404 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1405 a shared library.
1406
1407 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1408 libraries specified at link time are that:
1409
1410 @itemize @bullet
1411 @item
1412 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1413 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1414 resolvable at load time.
1415 @item
1416 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1417 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1418
1419 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1420 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1421 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1422 appropriate memset function.
1423 @end itemize
1424
1425 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1426 @item --no-undefined-version
1427 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1428 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1429 will be issued instead.
1430
1431 @kindex --default-symver
1432 @item --default-symver
1433 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1434 exported symbols.
1435
1436 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1437 @item --default-imported-symver
1438 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1439 imported symbols.
1440
1441 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1442 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1443 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1444 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1445 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1446 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1447 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1448 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1449 inappropriate.
1450
1451 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1452 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1453 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1454 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1455
1456 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1457 @item --no-whole-archive
1458 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1459 archive files.
1460
1461 @cindex output file after errors
1462 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1463 @item --noinhibit-exec
1464 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1465 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1466 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1467 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1468
1469 @kindex -nostdlib
1470 @item -nostdlib
1471 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1472 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1473 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1474
1475 @ifclear SingleFormat
1476 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1477 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1478 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1479 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1480 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1481 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1482 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1483 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1484 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1485 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1486 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1487 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1488 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1489 @end ifclear
1490
1491 @kindex -pie
1492 @kindex --pic-executable
1493 @item -pie
1494 @itemx --pic-executable
1495 @cindex position independent executables
1496 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1497 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1498 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1499 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1500 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1501 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1502
1503 @kindex -qmagic
1504 @item -qmagic
1505 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1506
1507 @kindex -Qy
1508 @item -Qy
1509 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1510
1511 @kindex --relax
1512 @cindex synthesizing linker
1513 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1514 @item --relax
1515 An option with machine dependent effects.
1516 @ifset GENERIC
1517 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1518 @end ifset
1519 @ifset H8300
1520 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1521 @end ifset
1522 @ifset I960
1523 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1524 @end ifset
1525 @ifset XTENSA
1526 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1527 @end ifset
1528 @ifset M68HC11
1529 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1530 @end ifset
1531 @ifset POWERPC
1532 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1533 @end ifset
1534
1535 On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1536 optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1537 in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1538 instructions in the output object file.
1539
1540 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1541 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1542 @ifset GENERIC
1543 This is known to be
1544 the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1545 @end ifset
1546
1547 @ifset GENERIC
1548 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1549 but ignored.
1550 @end ifset
1551
1552 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1553 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1554 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1555 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1556 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1557 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1558 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1559 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1560 @ifset GENERIC
1561 (such as VxWorks)
1562 @end ifset
1563 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1564 run-time memory.
1565
1566 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1567 or symbols needed for relocations.
1568
1569 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1570 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1571
1572 @ifset GENERIC
1573 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1574 @cindex runtime library search path
1575 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1576 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1577 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1578 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1579 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1580 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1581 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1582 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1583 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1584 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1585
1586 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1587 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1588 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1589 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1590 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1591 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1592 file systems.
1593
1594 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1595 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1596 the @option{-rpath} option.
1597 @end ifset
1598
1599 @ifset GENERIC
1600 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1601 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1602 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1603 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1604 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1605 of the input files.
1606
1607 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1608 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1609 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1610 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1611 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1612 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1613 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1614 appearing multiple times.
1615
1616 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1617 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1618 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1619 runtime linker would do.
1620
1621 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1622 libraries:
1623 @enumerate
1624 @item
1625 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1626 @item
1627 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1628 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1629 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1630 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1631 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1632 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1633 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1634 @item
1635 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1636 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1637 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1638 @item
1639 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1640 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1641 @item
1642 For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1643 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1644 @item
1645 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1646 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1647 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1648 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1649 @item
1650 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1651 @item
1652 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1653 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1654 @end enumerate
1655
1656 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1657 warning and continue with the link.
1658 @end ifset
1659
1660 @kindex -shared
1661 @kindex -Bshareable
1662 @item -shared
1663 @itemx -Bshareable
1664 @cindex shared libraries
1665 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1666 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1667 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1668 undefined symbols in the link.
1669
1670 @kindex --sort-common
1671 @item --sort-common
1672 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1673 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1674 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1675 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1676 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1677 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1678 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1679 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1680
1681 @kindex --sort-section=name
1682 @item --sort-section=name
1683 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1684 patterns in the linker script.
1685
1686 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1687 @item --sort-section=alignment
1688 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1689 patterns in the linker script.
1690
1691 @kindex --split-by-file
1692 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1693 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1694 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1695 size of 1 if not given.
1696
1697 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1698 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1699 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1700 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1701 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1702 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1703 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1704 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1705 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1706 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1707 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1708 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1709
1710 @kindex --stats
1711 @item --stats
1712 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1713 as execution time and memory usage.
1714
1715 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1716 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1717 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1718 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1719 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1720
1721 @kindex --traditional-format
1722 @cindex traditional format
1723 @item --traditional-format
1724 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1725 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1726 use the traditional format instead.
1727
1728 @cindex dbx
1729 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1730 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1731 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1732 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1733 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1734 combine duplicate entries.
1735
1736 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1737 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1738 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1739 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1740 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1741 line.
1742 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1743 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1744 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1745 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1746 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1747
1748 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1749 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1750 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1751 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1752 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1753 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1754 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1755 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1756 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1757
1758 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1759 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1760 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1761 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1762 of the first byte of the text segment.
1763
1764 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1765 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1766 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1767 values for @samp{method}:
1768
1769 @table @samp
1770 @item ignore-all
1771 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1772
1773 @item report-all
1774 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
1775
1776 @item ignore-in-object-files
1777 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1778 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1779
1780 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
1781 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1782 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1783 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1784 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1785 command line.
1786 @end table
1787
1788 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1789 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1790
1791 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1792 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1793 can change this to a warning.
1794
1795 @kindex --verbose
1796 @cindex verbose
1797 @item --dll-verbose
1798 @itemx --verbose
1799 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
1800 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1801 the linker script being used by the linker.
1802
1803 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1804 @cindex version script, symbol versions
1805 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1806 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1807 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
1808 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
1809 is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1810 @xref{VERSION}.
1811
1812 @kindex --warn-common
1813 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1814 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1815 @item --warn-common
1816 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
1817 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
1818 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1819 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
1820 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
1821 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1822
1823 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1824
1825 @table @samp
1826 @item int i = 1;
1827 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1828 file.
1829
1830 @item extern int i;
1831 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1832 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1833 variable somewhere.
1834
1835 @item int i;
1836 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1837 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1838 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1839 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1840 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1841 a definition of the same variable.
1842 @end table
1843
1844 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1845 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1846 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1847 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1848 a common symbol.
1849
1850 @enumerate
1851 @item
1852 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1853 definition for the symbol.
1854 @smallexample
1855 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1856 overridden by definition
1857 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1858 @end smallexample
1859
1860 @item
1861 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1862 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1863 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1864 @smallexample
1865 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1866 overriding common
1867 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1868 @end smallexample
1869
1870 @item
1871 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1872 @smallexample
1873 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1874 of `@var{symbol}'
1875 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1876 @end smallexample
1877
1878 @item
1879 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1880 @smallexample
1881 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1882 overridden by larger common
1883 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1884 @end smallexample
1885
1886 @item
1887 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1888 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1889 encountered in a different order.
1890 @smallexample
1891 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1892 overriding smaller common
1893 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1894 @end smallexample
1895 @end enumerate
1896
1897 @kindex --warn-constructors
1898 @item --warn-constructors
1899 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1900 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1901 detect the use of global constructors.
1902
1903 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1904 @item --warn-multiple-gp
1905 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1906 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1907 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1908 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1909 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1910 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1911 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1912 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1913 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1914 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1915 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1916
1917 @kindex --warn-once
1918 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1919 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1920 @item --warn-once
1921 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1922 which refers to it.
1923
1924 @kindex --warn-section-align
1925 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
1926 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
1927 @item --warn-section-align
1928 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1929 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1930 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1931 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1932 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1933
1934 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1935 @item --warn-shared-textrel
1936 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1937
1938 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1939 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1940 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1941 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1942 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1943
1944 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1945 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
1946 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1947 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1948
1949 @kindex --whole-archive
1950 @cindex including an entire archive
1951 @item --whole-archive
1952 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
1953 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
1954 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1955 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1956 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1957 library. This option may be used more than once.
1958
1959 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
1960 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1961 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
1962 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1963 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1964
1965 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1966 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
1967 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1968 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1969 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1970 @var{symbol}.
1971
1972 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1973 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1974 wishes to call the system function, it should call
1975 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1976
1977 Here is a trivial example:
1978
1979 @smallexample
1980 void *
1981 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
1982 @{
1983 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
1984 return __real_malloc (c);
1985 @}
1986 @end smallexample
1987
1988 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
1989 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1990 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1991 call the real @code{malloc} function.
1992
1993 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
1994 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
1995 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1996 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1997 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1998
1999 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2000 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2001 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2002 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2003
2004 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2005 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2006 @item --enable-new-dtags
2007 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2008 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2009 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2010 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2011 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2012 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2013 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2014
2015 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2016 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2017 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2018 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2019 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2020 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2021 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2022
2023 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2024 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2025 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2026 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2027 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2028 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2029 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2030
2031 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2032 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2033 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2034 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2035 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2036 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2037
2038 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2039 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2040 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2041 has been used.
2042
2043 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2044 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2045
2046 @kindex --build-id
2047 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2048 @item --build-id
2049 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2050 Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2051 The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2052 file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
2053 @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2054 parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2055 @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2056 @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2057 an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2058 characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2059 omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2060
2061 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2062 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2063 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2064 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2065 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2066 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2067
2068 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2069 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2070 @end table
2071
2072 @c man end
2073
2074 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2075
2076 @c man begin OPTIONS
2077
2078 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2079 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2080 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2081 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2082 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2083 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2084 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2085 object file).
2086
2087 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2088 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2089 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2090 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2091
2092 @table @gcctabopt
2093
2094 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2095 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2096 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2097 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2098 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2099
2100 @kindex --base-file
2101 @item --base-file @var{file}
2102 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2103 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2104 @file{dlltool}.
2105 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2106
2107 @kindex --dll
2108 @item --dll
2109 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2110 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2111 file.
2112 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2113
2114 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2115 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2116 @item --enable-long-section-names
2117 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2118 The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2119 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2120 for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2121 fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2122 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2123 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2124 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2125 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2126 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2127 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2128 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2129 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2130 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2131 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2132 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2133 image and not stripping symbols.
2134 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2135
2136 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2137 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2138 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2139 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2140 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2141 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2142 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2143 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2144 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2145 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2146 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2147 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2148 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2149 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2150 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2151 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2152 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2153 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2154
2155 @cindex DLLs, creating
2156 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2157 @item --export-all-symbols
2158 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2159 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2160 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2161 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2162 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2163 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2164 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2165 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2166 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2167 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2168 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2169 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2170 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2171 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2172 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2173 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2174 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2175 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2176 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2177 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2178 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2179 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2180 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2181
2182 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2183 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2184 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2185 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2186 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2187
2188 @kindex --file-alignment
2189 @item --file-alignment
2190 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2191 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2192 512.
2193 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2194
2195 @cindex heap size
2196 @kindex --heap
2197 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2198 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2199 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2200 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
2201 committed.
2202 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2203
2204 @cindex image base
2205 @kindex --image-base
2206 @item --image-base @var{value}
2207 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2208 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2209 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2210 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2211 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2212 for dlls.
2213 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2214
2215 @kindex --kill-at
2216 @item --kill-at
2217 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2218 symbols before they are exported.
2219 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2220
2221 @kindex --large-address-aware
2222 @item --large-address-aware
2223 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2224 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2225 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2226 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2227 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2228 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2229
2230 @kindex --major-image-version
2231 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2232 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2233 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2234
2235 @kindex --major-os-version
2236 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2237 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2238 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2239
2240 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2241 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2242 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2243 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2244
2245 @kindex --minor-image-version
2246 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2247 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2248 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2249
2250 @kindex --minor-os-version
2251 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2252 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2253 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2254
2255 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2256 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2257 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2258 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2259
2260 @cindex DEF files, creating
2261 @cindex DLLs, creating
2262 @kindex --output-def
2263 @item --output-def @var{file}
2264 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2265 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2266 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2267 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2268 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2269 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2270
2271 @cindex DLLs, creating
2272 @kindex --out-implib
2273 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2274 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2275 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2276 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2277 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2278 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2279 creation step.
2280 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2281
2282 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2283 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2284 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2285 using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2286 from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2287 collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2288 avoided.
2289 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2290
2291 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2292 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2293 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2294 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2295 default.
2296 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2297
2298 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2299 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2300 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2301 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2302 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2303 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2304 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2305 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2306 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2307 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2308
2309 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2310 @item --enable-auto-import
2311 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2312 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2313 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2314 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2315 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2316 specification published by Microsoft.
2317
2318 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2319 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2320 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2321 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2322 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2323
2324 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2325 see this message:
2326
2327 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2328 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2329
2330 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2331 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2332 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2333 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2334 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2335 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2336 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2337 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2338 the warning, and exit.
2339
2340 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2341 data type of the exported variable:
2342
2343 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2344 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2345 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2346
2347 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2348 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2349 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2350 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2351
2352 @example
2353 extern type extern_array[];
2354 extern_array[1] -->
2355 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2356 @end example
2357
2358 or
2359
2360 @example
2361 extern type extern_array[];
2362 extern_array[1] -->
2363 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2364 @end example
2365
2366 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2367 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2368
2369 @example
2370 extern struct s extern_struct;
2371 extern_struct.field -->
2372 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2373 @end example
2374
2375 or
2376
2377 @example
2378 extern long long extern_ll;
2379 extern_ll -->
2380 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2381 @end example
2382
2383 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2384 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2385 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
2386 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2387 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2388 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2389 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2390 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2391
2392 Original:
2393 @example
2394 --foo.h
2395 extern int arr[];
2396 --foo.c
2397 #include "foo.h"
2398 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2399 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2400 @}
2401 @end example
2402
2403 Solution 1:
2404 @example
2405 --foo.h
2406 extern int arr[];
2407 --foo.c
2408 #include "foo.h"
2409 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2410 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2411 volatile int *parr = arr;
2412 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2413 @}
2414 @end example
2415
2416 Solution 2:
2417 @example
2418 --foo.h
2419 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2420 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2421 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2422 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2423 #else
2424 #define FOO_IMPORT
2425 #endif
2426 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2427 --foo.c
2428 #include "foo.h"
2429 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2430 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2431 @}
2432 @end example
2433
2434 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2435 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2436 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2437 functions).
2438 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2439
2440 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2441 @item --disable-auto-import
2442 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2443 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2444 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2445
2446 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2447 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2448 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2449 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2450 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2451 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2452 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2453
2454 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2455 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2456 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2457 DLLs. This is the default.
2458 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2459
2460 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2461 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2462 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2463 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2464
2465 @kindex --section-alignment
2466 @item --section-alignment
2467 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2468 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2469 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2470
2471 @cindex stack size
2472 @kindex --stack
2473 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2474 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2475 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2476 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
2477 committed.
2478 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2479
2480 @kindex --subsystem
2481 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2482 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2483 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2484 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2485 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2486 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2487 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2488 @var{which}.
2489 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2490
2491 @end table
2492
2493 @c man end
2494
2495 @ifset M68HC11
2496 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2497
2498 @c man begin OPTIONS
2499
2500 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2501 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2502
2503 @table @gcctabopt
2504
2505 @kindex --no-trampoline
2506 @item --no-trampoline
2507 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2508 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2509 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2510
2511 @kindex --bank-window
2512 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2513 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2514 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2515 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2516 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2517
2518 @end table
2519
2520 @c man end
2521 @end ifset
2522
2523 @ifset M68K
2524 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2525
2526 @c man begin OPTIONS
2527
2528 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2529 when linking for 68K targets.
2530
2531 @table @gcctabopt
2532
2533 @kindex --got
2534 @item --got=@var{type}
2535 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2536 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2537 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2538 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2539
2540 @end table
2541
2542 @c man end
2543 @end ifset
2544
2545 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2546 @node Environment
2547 @section Environment Variables
2548
2549 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2550
2551 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2552 @ifclear SingleFormat
2553 @code{GNUTARGET},
2554 @end ifclear
2555 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2556
2557 @ifclear SingleFormat
2558 @kindex GNUTARGET
2559 @cindex default input format
2560 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2561 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2562 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2563 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2564 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2565 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2566 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2567 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2568 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2569 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2570 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2571 @end ifclear
2572
2573 @kindex LDEMULATION
2574 @cindex default emulation
2575 @cindex emulation, default
2576 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2577 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2578 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2579 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2580 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2581 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2582 linker was configured.
2583
2584 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2585 @cindex demangling, default
2586 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2587 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2588 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2589 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2590 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2591 options.
2592
2593 @c man end
2594 @end ifset
2595
2596 @node Scripts
2597 @chapter Linker Scripts
2598
2599 @cindex scripts
2600 @cindex linker scripts
2601 @cindex command files
2602 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2603 written in the linker command language.
2604
2605 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2606 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2607 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2608 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2609 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2610 described below.
2611
2612 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2613 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2614 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2615 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2616 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2617
2618 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2619 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2620 default linker script.
2621
2622 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2623 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2624 Linker Scripts}.
2625
2626 @menu
2627 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2628 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2629 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2630 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2631 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2632 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2633 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2634 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2635 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
2636 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2637 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2638 @end menu
2639
2640 @node Basic Script Concepts
2641 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2642 @cindex linker script concepts
2643 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2644 describe the linker script language.
2645
2646 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2647 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2648 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2649 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2650 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2651 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2652 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2653 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2654
2655 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2656 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2657 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2658 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2659 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2660 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2661 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2662 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2663 of debugging information.
2664
2665 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2666 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2667 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2668 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2669 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2670 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2671 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2672 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2673 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2674 RAM address would be the VMA.
2675
2676 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2677 program with the @samp{-h} option.
2678
2679 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2680 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2681 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2682 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2683 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2684 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2685 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2686
2687 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2688 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2689 option.
2690
2691 @node Script Format
2692 @section Linker Script Format
2693 @cindex linker script format
2694 Linker scripts are text files.
2695
2696 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2697 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2698 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2699 generally ignored.
2700
2701 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2702 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2703 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2704 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2705 file name.
2706
2707 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2708 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2709 to whitespace.
2710
2711 @node Simple Example
2712 @section Simple Linker Script Example
2713 @cindex linker script example
2714 @cindex example of linker script
2715 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2716
2717 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2718 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2719 memory layout of the output file.
2720
2721 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2722 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2723 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2724 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2725 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2726 your input files.
2727
2728 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
2729 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2730 linker script which will do that:
2731 @smallexample
2732 SECTIONS
2733 @{
2734 . = 0x10000;
2735 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2736 . = 0x8000000;
2737 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2738 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2739 @}
2740 @end smallexample
2741
2742 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2743 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2744 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2745
2746 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2747 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2748 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2749 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2750 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2751 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2752 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2753
2754 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2755 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2756 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2757 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2758 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2759 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2760
2761 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2762 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2763 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2764
2765 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2766 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2767 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2768 output section, the value of the location counter will be
2769 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2770 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
2771 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
2772
2773 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2774 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2775 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2776 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2777 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2778 sections.
2779
2780 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2781
2782 @node Simple Commands
2783 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
2784 @cindex linker script simple commands
2785 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2786
2787 @menu
2788 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2789 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2790 @ifclear SingleFormat
2791 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2792 @end ifclear
2793
2794 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
2795 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2796 @end menu
2797
2798 @node Entry Point
2799 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
2800 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2801 @cindex start of execution
2802 @cindex first instruction
2803 @cindex entry point
2804 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2805 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2806 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2807 @smallexample
2808 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2809 @end smallexample
2810
2811 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2812 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2813 stopping when one of them succeeds:
2814 @itemize @bullet
2815 @item
2816 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
2817 @item
2818 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
2819 @item
2820 the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
2821 @item
2822 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
2823 @item
2824 The address @code{0}.
2825 @end itemize
2826
2827 @node File Commands
2828 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
2829 @cindex linker script file commands
2830 Several linker script commands deal with files.
2831
2832 @table @code
2833 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2834 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2835 @cindex including a linker script
2836 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2837 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
2838 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
2839 10 levels deep.
2840
2841 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2842 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2843
2844 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2845 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2846 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2847 @cindex input files in linker scripts
2848 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
2849 @cindex linker script input object files
2850 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2851 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2852
2853 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2854 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2855 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2856
2857 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2858 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2859
2860 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2861 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2862 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2863 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2864 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2865 linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2866 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2867
2868 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
2869 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2870 @samp{-l}.
2871
2872 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2873 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2874 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2875
2876 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2877 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2878 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2879 @cindex grouping input files
2880 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2881 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2882 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2883 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2884
2885 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2886 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2887 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2888 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2889 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2890 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2891 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2892 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2893 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2894 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2895 setting afterwards.
2896
2897 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2898 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2899 @cindex output file name in linker script
2900 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2901 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2902 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2903 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2904 precedence.
2905
2906 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2907 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2908
2909 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2910 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2911 @cindex library search path in linker script
2912 @cindex archive search path in linker script
2913 @cindex search path in linker script
2914 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
2915 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
2916 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2917 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2918 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2919 the command line option are searched first.
2920
2921 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2922 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2923 @cindex first input file
2924 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2925 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2926 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2927 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2928 first file.
2929 @end table
2930
2931 @ifclear SingleFormat
2932 @node Format Commands
2933 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
2934 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2935
2936 @table @code
2937 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2938 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2939 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2940 @cindex output file format in linker script
2941 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2942 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
2943 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2944 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2945 line option takes precedence.
2946
2947 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2948 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2949 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2950 desired endianness.
2951
2952 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2953 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2954 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2955 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2956
2957 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2958 command:
2959 @smallexample
2960 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2961 @end smallexample
2962 This says that the default format for the output file is
2963 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2964 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2965 format.
2966
2967 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2968 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2969 @cindex input file format in linker script
2970 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2971 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2972 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2973 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2974 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2975 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2976 @end table
2977 @end ifclear
2978
2979 @node REGION_ALIAS
2980 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
2981 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
2982 @cindex region alias
2983 @cindex region names
2984
2985 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
2986 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
2987
2988 @smallexample
2989 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
2990 @end smallexample
2991
2992 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
2993 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
2994 to memory regions. An example follows.
2995
2996 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
2997 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
2998 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
2999 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3000 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3001 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3002 sections:
3003
3004 @itemize @bullet
3005 @item
3006 @code{.text} program code;
3007 @item
3008 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3009 @item
3010 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3011 @item
3012 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3013 @end itemize
3014
3015 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3016 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3017 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3018 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3019 @code{C}:
3020 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3021 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3022 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3023 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3024 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3025 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3026 @end multitable
3027 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3028 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3029 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3030 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3031
3032 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3033 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3034 memory layout:
3035 @smallexample
3036 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3037
3038 SECTIONS
3039 @{
3040 .text :
3041 @{
3042 *(.text)
3043 @} > REGION_TEXT
3044 .rodata :
3045 @{
3046 *(.rodata)
3047 rodata_end = .;
3048 @} > REGION_RODATA
3049 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3050 @{
3051 data_start = .;
3052 *(.data)
3053 @} > REGION_DATA
3054 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3055 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3056 .bss :
3057 @{
3058 *(.bss)
3059 @} > REGION_BSS
3060 @}
3061 @end smallexample
3062
3063 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3064 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3065 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3066 @table @code
3067 @item A
3068 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3069 @smallexample
3070 MEMORY
3071 @{
3072 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3073 @}
3074
3075 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3076 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3077 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3078 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3079 @end smallexample
3080 @item B
3081 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3082 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3083 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3084 @smallexample
3085 MEMORY
3086 @{
3087 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3088 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3089 @}
3090
3091 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3092 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3093 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3094 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3095 @end smallexample
3096 @item C
3097 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3098 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3099 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3100 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3101 @smallexample
3102 MEMORY
3103 @{
3104 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3105 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3106 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3107 @}
3108
3109 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3110 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3111 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3112 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3113 @end smallexample
3114 @end table
3115
3116 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3117 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3118 necessary:
3119 @smallexample
3120 #include <string.h>
3121
3122 extern char data_start [];
3123 extern char data_size [];
3124 extern char data_load_start [];
3125
3126 void copy_data(void)
3127 @{
3128 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3129 @{
3130 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3131 @}
3132 @}
3133 @end smallexample
3134
3135 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3136 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3137 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3138
3139 @table @code
3140 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3141 @kindex ASSERT
3142 @cindex assertion in linker script
3143 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3144 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3145
3146 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3147 @kindex EXTERN
3148 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3149 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3150 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3151 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3152 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3153 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3154
3155 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3156 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3157 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3158 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3159 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3160 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3161
3162 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3163 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3164 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3165 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3166 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3167 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3168
3169 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3170 @kindex INSERT
3171 @cindex insert user script into default script
3172 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3173 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3174 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3175 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3176 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3177 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3178 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3179 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3180 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3181 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3182 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3183 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3184 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3185
3186 @smallexample
3187 SECTIONS
3188 @{
3189 OVERLAY :
3190 @{
3191 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3192 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3193 @}
3194 @}
3195 INSERT AFTER .text;
3196 @end smallexample
3197
3198 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3199 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3200 @cindex cross references
3201 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3202 references among certain output sections.
3203
3204 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3205 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3206 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3207 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3208 a function defined in the other section.
3209
3210 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3211 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3212 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3213 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3214 names.
3215
3216 @ifclear SingleFormat
3217 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3218 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3219 @cindex machine architecture
3220 @cindex architecture
3221 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3222 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3223 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3224 the @samp{-f} option.
3225 @end ifclear
3226 @end table
3227
3228 @node Assignments
3229 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3230 @cindex assignment in scripts
3231 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3232 @cindex variables, defining
3233 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3234 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3235
3236 @menu
3237 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3238 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3239 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3240 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3241 @end menu
3242
3243 @node Simple Assignments
3244 @subsection Simple Assignments
3245
3246 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3247
3248 @table @code
3249 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3250 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3251 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3252 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3253 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3254 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3255 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3256 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3257 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3258 @end table
3259
3260 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3261 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3262 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3263
3264 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3265 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3266
3267 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3268
3269 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3270
3271 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3272 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3273 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3274
3275 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3276 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3277
3278 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3279 assignments may be used:
3280
3281 @smallexample
3282 floating_point = 0;
3283 SECTIONS
3284 @{
3285 .text :
3286 @{
3287 *(.text)
3288 _etext = .;
3289 @}
3290 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3291 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3292 @}
3293 @end smallexample
3294 @noindent
3295 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3296 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3297 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3298 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3299 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3300
3301 @node PROVIDE
3302 @subsection PROVIDE
3303 @cindex PROVIDE
3304 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3305 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3306 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3307 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3308 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3309 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3310 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3311 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3312
3313 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3314 @smallexample
3315 SECTIONS
3316 @{
3317 .text :
3318 @{
3319 *(.text)
3320 _etext = .;
3321 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3322 @}
3323 @}
3324 @end smallexample
3325
3326 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3327 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3328 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3329 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3330 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3331 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3332
3333 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3334 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3335 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3336 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3337 hidden and won't be exported.
3338
3339 @node Source Code Reference
3340 @subsection Source Code Reference
3341
3342 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3343 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3344 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3345 symbol that does not have a value.
3346
3347 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3348 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3349 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3350 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3351 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3352 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3353 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3354 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3355
3356 @smallexample
3357 extern int foo;
3358 @end smallexample
3359
3360 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3361
3362 @smallexample
3363 _foo = 1000;
3364 @end smallexample
3365
3366 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3367 transformation has taken place.
3368
3369 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3370 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3371 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3372 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3373 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3374 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3375 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3376
3377 @smallexample
3378 int foo = 1000;
3379 @end smallexample
3380
3381 creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3382 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3383 number 1000 is initially stored.
3384
3385 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3386 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3387 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3388 So:
3389
3390 @smallexample
3391 foo = 1;
3392 @end smallexample
3393
3394 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3395 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3396 address. Whereas:
3397
3398 @smallexample
3399 int * a = & foo;
3400 @end smallexample
3401
3402 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3403 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3404 the variable @samp{a}.
3405
3406 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3407 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3408 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3409
3410 @smallexample
3411 foo = 1000;
3412 @end smallexample
3413
3414 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3415 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3416 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3417 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3418 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3419
3420 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3421 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3422 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3423 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3424 linker script contains these declarations:
3425
3426 @smallexample
3427 @group
3428 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3429 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3430 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3431 @end group
3432 @end smallexample
3433
3434 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3435
3436 @smallexample
3437 @group
3438 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3439
3440 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3441 @end group
3442 @end smallexample
3443
3444 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3445
3446 @node SECTIONS
3447 @section SECTIONS Command
3448 @kindex SECTIONS
3449 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3450 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3451
3452 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3453 @smallexample
3454 SECTIONS
3455 @{
3456 @var{sections-command}
3457 @var{sections-command}
3458 @dots{}
3459 @}
3460 @end smallexample
3461
3462 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3463
3464 @itemize @bullet
3465 @item
3466 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3467 @item
3468 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3469 @item
3470 an output section description
3471 @item
3472 an overlay description
3473 @end itemize
3474
3475 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3476 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3477 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3478 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3479 the layout of the output file.
3480
3481 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3482 below.
3483
3484 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3485 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3486 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3487 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3488 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3489 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3490
3491 @menu
3492 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3493 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3494 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3495 * Input Section:: Input section description
3496 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3497 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3498 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3499 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3500 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3501 @end menu
3502
3503 @node Output Section Description
3504 @subsection Output Section Description
3505 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3506 @smallexample
3507 @group
3508 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3509 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3510 @{
3511 @var{output-section-command}
3512 @var{output-section-command}
3513 @dots{}
3514 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
3515 @end group
3516 @end smallexample
3517
3518 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3519
3520 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3521 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3522 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3523
3524 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3525
3526 @itemize @bullet
3527 @item
3528 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3529 @item
3530 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3531 @item
3532 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3533 @item
3534 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3535 @end itemize
3536
3537 @node Output Section Name
3538 @subsection Output Section Name
3539 @cindex name, section
3540 @cindex section name
3541 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3542 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3543 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3544 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3545 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3546 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3547 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3548 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3549 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3550 commas must be quoted.
3551
3552 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3553 Discarding}.
3554
3555 @node Output Section Address
3556 @subsection Output Section Address
3557 @cindex address, section
3558 @cindex section address
3559 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3560 address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3561 the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3562 based on the current value of the location counter.
3563
3564 If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3565 set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3566 @var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3567 current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3568 requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3569 output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3570 within the output section.
3571
3572 For example,
3573 @smallexample
3574 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3575 @end smallexample
3576 @noindent
3577 and
3578 @smallexample
3579 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3580 @end smallexample
3581 @noindent
3582 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3583 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3584 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3585 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3586 section.
3587
3588 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3589 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3590 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3591 do something like this:
3592 @smallexample
3593 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3594 @end smallexample
3595 @noindent
3596 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3597 aligned upward to the specified value.
3598
3599 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3600 location counter.
3601
3602 @node Input Section
3603 @subsection Input Section Description
3604 @cindex input sections
3605 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3606 The most common output section command is an input section description.
3607
3608 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3609 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3610 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3611 map the input files into your memory layout.
3612
3613 @menu
3614 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3615 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3616 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3617 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3618 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
3619 @end menu
3620
3621 @node Input Section Basics
3622 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
3623 @cindex input section basics
3624 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3625 by a list of section names in parentheses.
3626
3627 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3628 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3629
3630 The most common input section description is to include all input
3631 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3632 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3633 @smallexample
3634 *(.text)
3635 @end smallexample
3636 @noindent
3637 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3638 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3639 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3640 example:
3641 @smallexample
3642 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3643 @end smallexample
3644 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3645 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
3646
3647 There are two ways to include more than one section:
3648 @smallexample
3649 *(.text .rdata)
3650 *(.text) *(.rdata)
3651 @end smallexample
3652 @noindent
3653 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3654 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
3655 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3656 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
3657 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3658 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
3659
3660 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3661 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3662 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3663 @smallexample
3664 data.o(.data)
3665 @end smallexample
3666
3667 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3668 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3669 with no whitespace around the colon.
3670
3671 @table @samp
3672 @item archive:file
3673 matches file within archive
3674 @item archive:
3675 matches the whole archive
3676 @item :file
3677 matches file but not one in an archive
3678 @end table
3679
3680 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3681 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3682 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3683 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3684 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3685 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3686 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3687 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3688 command.
3689
3690 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3691 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3692 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3693 @smallexample
3694 data.o
3695 @end smallexample
3696
3697 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3698 and does not contain any wild card
3699 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3700 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3701 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3702 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3703 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3704 the archive search path.
3705
3706 @node Input Section Wildcards
3707 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3708 @cindex input section wildcards
3709 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
3710 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
3711 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
3712 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3713 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3714
3715 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3716 pattern for the file name.
3717
3718 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3719
3720 @table @samp
3721 @item *
3722 matches any number of characters
3723 @item ?
3724 matches any single character
3725 @item [@var{chars}]
3726 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3727 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3728 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3729 @item \
3730 quotes the following character
3731 @end table
3732
3733 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3734 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3735 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3736 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3737 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3738 a @samp{/} character.
3739
3740 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3741 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3742 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3743
3744 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3745 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3746 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3747 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3748 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3749 @smallexample
3750 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3751 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3752 @end smallexample
3753
3754 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
3755 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3756 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
3757 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3758 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3759 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
3760 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3761
3762 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3763 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3764 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3765 ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3766
3767 @cindex SORT
3768 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3769
3770 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3771 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3772
3773 @enumerate
3774 @item
3775 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3776 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3777 sections have the same name.
3778 @item
3779 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3780 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3781 sections have the same alignment.
3782 @item
3783 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
3784 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3785 @item
3786 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3787 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3788 @item
3789 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3790 @end enumerate
3791
3792 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3793 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3794 takes precedence over the command line option.
3795
3796 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3797 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3798 treated as nested sorting command.
3799
3800 @enumerate
3801 @item
3802 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3803 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3804 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3805 @item
3806 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3807 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3808 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3809 @end enumerate
3810
3811 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3812 command line option will be ignored.
3813
3814 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3815 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3816 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3817
3818 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3819 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3820 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3821 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3822 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3823 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3824 @smallexample
3825 @group
3826 SECTIONS @{
3827 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3828 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3829 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3830 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3831 @}
3832 @end group
3833 @end smallexample
3834
3835 @node Input Section Common
3836 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
3837 @cindex common symbol placement
3838 @cindex uninitialized data placement
3839 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3840 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3841 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3842 named @samp{COMMON}.
3843
3844 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3845 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3846 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3847 input files are placed in another section.
3848
3849 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3850 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3851 @smallexample
3852 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3853 @end smallexample
3854
3855 @cindex scommon section
3856 @cindex small common symbols
3857 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3858 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3859 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3860 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3861 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3862 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3863 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3864 locations.
3865
3866 @cindex [COMMON]
3867 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3868 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3869 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
3870
3871 @node Input Section Keep
3872 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
3873 @cindex KEEP
3874 @cindex garbage collection
3875 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
3876 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
3877 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3878 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
3879 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
3880
3881 @node Input Section Example
3882 @subsubsection Input Section Example
3883 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3884 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3885 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3886 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3887 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3888 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3889 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3890 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3891 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3892
3893 @smallexample
3894 @group
3895 SECTIONS @{
3896 outputa 0x10000 :
3897 @{
3898 all.o
3899 foo.o (.input1)
3900 @}
3901 @end group
3902 @group
3903 outputb :
3904 @{
3905 foo.o (.input2)
3906 foo1.o (.input1)
3907 @}
3908 @end group
3909 @group
3910 outputc :
3911 @{
3912 *(.input1)
3913 *(.input2)
3914 @}
3915 @}
3916 @end group
3917 @end smallexample
3918
3919 @node Output Section Data
3920 @subsection Output Section Data
3921 @cindex data
3922 @cindex section data
3923 @cindex output section data
3924 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3925 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3926 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3927 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3928 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3929 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3930 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3931 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3932 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3933 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3934 counter.
3935
3936 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3937 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3938 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3939 stored.
3940
3941 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3942 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3943 @smallexample
3944 BYTE(1)
3945 LONG(addr)
3946 @end smallexample
3947
3948 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3949 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3950 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3951 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3952 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3953
3954 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3955 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3956 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3957 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3958 endianness of the first input object file.
3959
3960 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
3961 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3962 @smallexample
3963 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3964 @end smallexample
3965 whereas this will work:
3966 @smallexample
3967 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3968 @end smallexample
3969
3970 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3971 @cindex holes, filling
3972 @cindex unspecified memory
3973 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3974 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3975 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3976 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
3977 with the value of the expression, repeated as
3978 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3979 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3980 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3981 different parts of an output section.
3982
3983 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
3984 value @samp{0x90}:
3985 @smallexample
3986 FILL(0x90909090)
3987 @end smallexample
3988
3989 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
3990 section attribute, but it only affects the
3991 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3992 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
3993 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
3994 expression.
3995
3996 @node Output Section Keywords
3997 @subsection Output Section Keywords
3998 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3999 commands.
4000
4001 @table @code
4002 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4003 @cindex input filename symbols
4004 @cindex filename symbols
4005 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4006 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4007 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4008 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4009 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4010
4011 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4012 normally used for any other object file format.
4013
4014 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4015 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4016 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4017 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4018 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4019 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4020 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4021 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4022 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4023 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4024 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4025 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4026 ignored for other object file formats.
4027
4028 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4029 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4030 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4031 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4032 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4033 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4034 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4035 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4036 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4037 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4038 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4039 @code{exit}.
4040
4041 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4042 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4043 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4044 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4045 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4046 runtime code expects to see.
4047
4048 @smallexample
4049 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4050 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4051 *(.ctors)
4052 LONG(0)
4053 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4054 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4055 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4056 *(.dtors)
4057 LONG(0)
4058 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4059 @end smallexample
4060
4061 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4062 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4063 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4064 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4065 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4066 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4067 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4068 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4069
4070 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4071 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4072 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4073 scripts.
4074
4075 @end table
4076
4077 @node Output Section Discarding
4078 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4079 @cindex discarding sections
4080 @cindex sections, discarding
4081 @cindex removing sections
4082 The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4083 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4084 be present in any of the input files. For example:
4085 @smallexample
4086 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4087 @end smallexample
4088 @noindent
4089 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4090 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4091 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4092 space in an output section will also create the output section.
4093
4094 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4095 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4096 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4097 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4098 section is discarded.
4099
4100 @cindex /DISCARD/
4101 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4102 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4103 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4104
4105 @node Output Section Attributes
4106 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4107 @cindex output section attributes
4108 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4109 like this:
4110 @smallexample
4111 @group
4112 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4113 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4114 @{
4115 @var{output-section-command}
4116 @var{output-section-command}
4117 @dots{}
4118 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4119 @end group
4120 @end smallexample
4121 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4122 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4123 remaining section attributes.
4124
4125 @menu
4126 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4127 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4128 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4129 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4130 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4131 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4132 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4133 @end menu
4134
4135 @node Output Section Type
4136 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4137 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4138 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4139
4140 @table @code
4141 @item NOLOAD
4142 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4143 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4144 @item DSECT
4145 @itemx COPY
4146 @itemx INFO
4147 @itemx OVERLAY
4148 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4149 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4150 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4151 section when the program is run.
4152 @end table
4153
4154 @kindex NOLOAD
4155 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4156 @cindex loading, preventing
4157 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4158 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4159 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4160 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4161 need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4162 @samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4163 @smallexample
4164 @group
4165 SECTIONS @{
4166 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4167 @dots{}
4168 @}
4169 @end group
4170 @end smallexample
4171
4172 @node Output Section LMA
4173 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4174 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4175 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4176 @cindex load address
4177 @cindex section load address
4178 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4179 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4180 an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4181 Address}).
4182
4183 The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4184 the load address of the section.
4185
4186 Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4187 specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4188 Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4189 linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
4190
4191 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4192 section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4193 VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4194 section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4195 or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4196 to the VMA.
4197 @xref{Output Section Region}.
4198
4199 @cindex ROM initialized data
4200 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4201 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4202 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4203 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4204 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4205 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4206 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4207 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4208 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4209
4210 @smallexample
4211 @group
4212 SECTIONS
4213 @{
4214 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4215 .mdata 0x2000 :
4216 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4217 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4218 .bss 0x3000 :
4219 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4220 @}
4221 @end group
4222 @end smallexample
4223
4224 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4225 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4226 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4227 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4228 script.
4229
4230 @smallexample
4231 @group
4232 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4233 char *src = &_etext;
4234 char *dst = &_data;
4235
4236 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4237 while (dst < &_edata) @{
4238 *dst++ = *src++;
4239 @}
4240
4241 /* Zero bss */
4242 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4243 *dst = 0;
4244 @end group
4245 @end smallexample
4246
4247 @node Forced Output Alignment
4248 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4249 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4250 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4251 @cindex output section alignment
4252 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
4253
4254 @node Forced Input Alignment
4255 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4256 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4257 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4258 @cindex input section alignment
4259 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4260 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4261 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4262
4263 @node Output Section Region
4264 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4265 @kindex >@var{region}
4266 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4267 @cindex memory regions and sections
4268 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4269 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4270
4271 Here is a simple example:
4272 @smallexample
4273 @group
4274 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4275 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4276 @end group
4277 @end smallexample
4278
4279 @node Output Section Phdr
4280 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4281 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4282 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4283 @cindex program headers and sections
4284 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4285 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4286 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4287 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4288 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4289 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4290
4291 Here is a simple example:
4292 @smallexample
4293 @group
4294 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4295 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4296 @end group
4297 @end smallexample
4298
4299 @node Output Section Fill
4300 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4301 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4302 @cindex section fill pattern
4303 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4304 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4305 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4306 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4307 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4308 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4309 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4310 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4311 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4312 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4313 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4314 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4315 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4316
4317 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4318 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4319
4320 Here is a simple example:
4321 @smallexample
4322 @group
4323 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4324 @end group
4325 @end smallexample
4326
4327 @node Overlay Description
4328 @subsection Overlay Description
4329 @kindex OVERLAY
4330 @cindex overlays
4331 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4332 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4333 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4334 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4335 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4336 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4337 than another.
4338
4339 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4340 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4341 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4342 command is as follows:
4343 @smallexample
4344 @group
4345 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4346 @{
4347 @var{secname1}
4348 @{
4349 @var{output-section-command}
4350 @var{output-section-command}
4351 @dots{}
4352 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4353 @var{secname2}
4354 @{
4355 @var{output-section-command}
4356 @var{output-section-command}
4357 @dots{}
4358 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4359 @dots{}
4360 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4361 @end group
4362 @end smallexample
4363
4364 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4365 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4366 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4367 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4368 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4369 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4370
4371 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4372 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4373 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4374 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4375 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4376 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4377
4378 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4379 among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4380 all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4381 section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4382 NOCROSSREFS}.
4383
4384 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4385 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4386 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4387 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4388 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4389 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4390 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4391
4392 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4393 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4394
4395 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4396 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4397 @smallexample
4398 @group
4399 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4400 @{
4401 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4402 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4403 @}
4404 @end group
4405 @end smallexample
4406 @noindent
4407 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4408 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4409 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4410 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4411 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4412 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4413
4414 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4415 like the following.
4416
4417 @smallexample
4418 @group
4419 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4420 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4421 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4422 @end group
4423 @end smallexample
4424
4425 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4426 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4427 example could have been written identically as follows.
4428
4429 @smallexample
4430 @group
4431 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4432 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4433 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
4434 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4435 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4436 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
4437 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4438 @end group
4439 @end smallexample
4440
4441 @node MEMORY
4442 @section MEMORY Command
4443 @kindex MEMORY
4444 @cindex memory regions
4445 @cindex regions of memory
4446 @cindex allocating memory
4447 @cindex discontinuous memory
4448 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4449 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4450
4451 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4452 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4453 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4454 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4455 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4456 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4457 around to fit into the available regions.
4458
4459 A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4460 command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4461 you wish. The syntax is:
4462 @smallexample
4463 @group
4464 MEMORY
4465 @{
4466 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4467 @dots{}
4468 @}
4469 @end group
4470 @end smallexample
4471
4472 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4473 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4474 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4475 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4476 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4477 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4478 command.
4479
4480 @cindex memory region attributes
4481 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4482 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4483 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4484 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4485 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4486 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4487 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4488
4489 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4490 @table @samp
4491 @item R
4492 Read-only section
4493 @item W
4494 Read/write section
4495 @item X
4496 Executable section
4497 @item A
4498 Allocatable section
4499 @item I
4500 Initialized section
4501 @item L
4502 Same as @samp{I}
4503 @item !
4504 Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4505 @end table
4506
4507 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4508 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4509 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4510 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4511 attributes.
4512
4513 @kindex ORIGIN =
4514 @kindex o =
4515 @kindex org =
4516 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4517 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4518 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4519 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4520 @code{ORG}).
4521
4522 @kindex LENGTH =
4523 @kindex len =
4524 @kindex l =
4525 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4526 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
4527 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4528 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
4529
4530 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4531 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4532 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4533 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4534 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4535 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4536 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4537 region.
4538
4539 @smallexample
4540 @group
4541 MEMORY
4542 @{
4543 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4544 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4545 @}
4546 @end group
4547 @end smallexample
4548
4549 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4550 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4551 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4552 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4553 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4554 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4555 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4556 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4557 region, the linker will issue an error message.
4558
4559 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4560 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
4561 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4562
4563 @smallexample
4564 @group
4565 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4566 @end group
4567 @end smallexample
4568
4569 @node PHDRS
4570 @section PHDRS Command
4571 @kindex PHDRS
4572 @cindex program headers
4573 @cindex ELF program headers
4574 @cindex program segments
4575 @cindex segments, ELF
4576 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4577 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4578 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4579 program with the @samp{-p} option.
4580
4581 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4582 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4583 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4584 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4585 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4586
4587 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4588 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4589 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4590 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4591 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4592
4593 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4594 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4595 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4596
4597 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4598 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4599
4600 @smallexample
4601 @group
4602 PHDRS
4603 @{
4604 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4605 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4606 @}
4607 @end group
4608 @end smallexample
4609
4610 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4611 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4612 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4613 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4614 must have a distinct name.
4615
4616 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4617 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4618 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4619 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4620 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4621 Section Phdr}.
4622
4623 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4624 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4625 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4626 contain the section.
4627
4628 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4629 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4630 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4631 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4632 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4633 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4634 segment at all.
4635
4636 @kindex FILEHDR
4637 @kindex PHDRS
4638 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4639 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4640 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4641 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4642 include the ELF program headers themselves.
4643
4644 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4645 value of the keyword.
4646
4647 @table @asis
4648 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4649 Indicates an unused program header.
4650
4651 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4652 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4653 the file.
4654
4655 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4656 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4657
4658 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4659 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4660 found.
4661
4662 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4663 Indicates a segment holding note information.
4664
4665 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4666 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4667 ABI.
4668
4669 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4670 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4671
4672 @item @var{expression}
4673 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4674 be used for types not defined above.
4675 @end table
4676
4677 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4678 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4679 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4680 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4681 output section attribute.
4682
4683 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4684 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4685 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4686 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4687 header.
4688
4689 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4690 headers used on a native ELF system.
4691
4692 @example
4693 @group
4694 PHDRS
4695 @{
4696 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4697 interp PT_INTERP ;
4698 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4699 data PT_LOAD ;
4700 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4701 @}
4702
4703 SECTIONS
4704 @{
4705 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4706 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4707 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4708 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4709 @dots{}
4710 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4711 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4712 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4713 @dots{}
4714 @}
4715 @end group
4716 @end example
4717
4718 @node VERSION
4719 @section VERSION Command
4720 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4721 @cindex symbol versions
4722 @cindex version script
4723 @cindex versions of symbols
4724 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4725 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4726 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4727 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4728 shared library.
4729
4730 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4731 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4732 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4733
4734 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4735 @smallexample
4736 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4737 @end smallexample
4738
4739 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4740 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4741 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4742 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4743 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4744 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4745 library.
4746
4747 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4748 examples.
4749
4750 @smallexample
4751 VERS_1.1 @{
4752 global:
4753 foo1;
4754 local:
4755 old*;
4756 original*;
4757 new*;
4758 @};
4759
4760 VERS_1.2 @{
4761 foo2;
4762 @} VERS_1.1;
4763
4764 VERS_2.0 @{
4765 bar1; bar2;
4766 extern "C++" @{
4767 ns::*;
4768 "int f(int, double)";
4769 @}
4770 @} VERS_1.2;
4771 @end smallexample
4772
4773 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4774 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4775 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4776 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
4777 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4778 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4779 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4780 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
4781 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4782 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4783
4784 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4785 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4786 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4787
4788 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4789 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4790 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4791
4792 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4793 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4794 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
4795 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
4796 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4797 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4798 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4799 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4800 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4801
4802 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4803 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4804 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4805 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4806
4807 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
4808 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4809 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4810 won't.
4811
4812 @smallexample
4813 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
4814 @end smallexample
4815
4816 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4817 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4818 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4819 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4820 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4821 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4822 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4823 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4824 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4825 search for each symbol reference.
4826
4827 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4828 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4829 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4830 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4831 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4832 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4833 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4834 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4835 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4836
4837 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4838 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4839 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4840 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4841 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4842 @smallexample
4843 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4844 @end smallexample
4845 @noindent
4846 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4847 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4848 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
4849 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4850 takes precedence over a version script.
4851
4852 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4853 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4854 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4855 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4856 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4857
4858 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4859 source file. Here is an example:
4860
4861 @smallexample
4862 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4863 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4864 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4865 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4866 @end smallexample
4867
4868 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4869 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4870 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4871 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4872
4873 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4874 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4875 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4876 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4877 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4878 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4879
4880 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4881 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
4882 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
4883 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4884
4885 You can also specify the language in the version script:
4886
4887 @smallexample
4888 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4889 @end smallexample
4890
4891 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
4892 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4893 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4894 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4895
4896 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4897 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4898 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4899 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4900 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4901 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4902 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4903 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4904 expect when you upgrade.
4905
4906 @node Expressions
4907 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4908 @cindex expressions
4909 @cindex arithmetic
4910 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4911 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4912 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4913 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4914
4915 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4916
4917 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4918 expressions.
4919
4920 @menu
4921 * Constants:: Constants
4922 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
4923 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
4924 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4925 * Operators:: Operators
4926 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
4927 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4928 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4929 @end menu
4930
4931 @node Constants
4932 @subsection Constants
4933 @cindex integer notation
4934 @cindex constants in linker scripts
4935 All constants are integers.
4936
4937 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4938 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4939 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4940 @samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4941 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4942 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
4943
4944 @cindex scaled integers
4945 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
4946 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
4947 @cindex suffixes for integers
4948 @cindex integer suffixes
4949 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4950 constant by
4951 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4952 @ifnottex
4953 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4954 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4955 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4956 @end ifnottex
4957 @tex
4958 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4959 @end tex
4960 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4961 respectively. For example, the following
4962 all refer to the same quantity:
4963
4964 @smallexample
4965 _fourk_1 = 4K;
4966 _fourk_2 = 4096;
4967 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
4968 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
4969 @end smallexample
4970
4971 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
4972 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
4973
4974 @node Symbols
4975 @subsection Symbol Names
4976 @cindex symbol names
4977 @cindex names
4978 @cindex quoted symbol names
4979 @kindex "
4980 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4981 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4982 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4983 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4984 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4985 @smallexample
4986 "SECTION" = 9;
4987 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
4988 @end smallexample
4989
4990 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4991 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4992 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4993
4994 @node Orphan Sections
4995 @subsection Orphan Sections
4996 @cindex orphan
4997 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4998 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4999 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5000 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5001 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5002 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5003 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5004 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5005 at the end of the file.
5006
5007 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5008 well as section flag.
5009
5010 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5011 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5012 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5013 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5014 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5015 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5016 character.
5017
5018 @node Location Counter
5019 @subsection The Location Counter
5020 @kindex .
5021 @cindex dot
5022 @cindex location counter
5023 @cindex current output location
5024 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5025 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5026 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5027 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5028 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5029
5030 @cindex holes
5031 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5032 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5033 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5034 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5035 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5036
5037 @smallexample
5038 SECTIONS
5039 @{
5040 output :
5041 @{
5042 file1(.text)
5043 . = . + 1000;
5044 file2(.text)
5045 . += 1000;
5046 file3(.text)
5047 @} = 0x12345678;
5048 @}
5049 @end smallexample
5050 @noindent
5051 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5052 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5053 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5054 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5055 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5056 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5057
5058 @cindex dot inside sections
5059 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5060 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5061 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5062 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5063 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5064 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5065
5066 @smallexample
5067 SECTIONS
5068 @{
5069 . = 0x100
5070 .text: @{
5071 *(.text)
5072 . = 0x200
5073 @}
5074 . = 0x500
5075 .data: @{
5076 *(.data)
5077 . += 0x600
5078 @}
5079 @}
5080 @end smallexample
5081
5082 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5083 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5084 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5085 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5086 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5087 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5088 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5089 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5090
5091 @cindex dot outside sections
5092 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5093 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5094 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5095
5096 @smallexample
5097 SECTIONS
5098 @{
5099 start_of_text = . ;
5100 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5101 end_of_text = . ;
5102
5103 start_of_data = . ;
5104 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5105 end_of_data = . ;
5106 @}
5107 @end smallexample
5108
5109 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5110 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5111 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5112 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5113 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5114 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5115 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5116 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5117 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5118 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5119 as follows:
5120
5121 @smallexample
5122 SECTIONS
5123 @{
5124 start_of_text = . ;
5125 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5126 end_of_text = . ;
5127
5128 start_of_data = . ;
5129 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5130 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5131 end_of_data = . ;
5132 @}
5133 @end smallexample
5134
5135 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5136 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5137 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5138 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5139 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5140 section. So you could write:
5141
5142 @smallexample
5143 SECTIONS
5144 @{
5145 start_of_text = . ;
5146 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5147 end_of_text = . ;
5148
5149 . = . ;
5150 start_of_data = . ;
5151 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5152 end_of_data = . ;
5153 @}
5154 @end smallexample
5155
5156 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5157 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5158
5159 @need 2000
5160 @node Operators
5161 @subsection Operators
5162 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5163 @cindex arithmetic operators
5164 @cindex precedence in expressions
5165 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5166 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5167 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5168 @ifnottex
5169 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5170 @smallexample
5171 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5172 (highest)
5173 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5174 2 left * / %
5175 3 left + -
5176 4 left >> <<
5177 5 left == != > < <= >=
5178 6 left &
5179 7 left |
5180 8 left &&
5181 9 left ||
5182 10 right ? :
5183 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5184 (lowest)
5185 @end smallexample
5186 Notes:
5187 (1) Prefix operators
5188 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5189 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5190 @end ifnottex
5191 @tex
5192 \vskip \baselineskip
5193 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5194 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5195 \hrule
5196 \halign
5197 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5198 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5199 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5200 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5201 \noalign{\hrule}
5202 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5203 &highest&&&&&\cr
5204 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5205 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5206 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5207 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5208 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5209 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5210 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5211 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5212 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5213 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5214 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5215 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5216 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5217 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5218 \hrule}
5219 @end tex
5220 @iftex
5221 {
5222 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5223 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5224 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5225 }
5226 @end iftex
5227 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5228
5229 @node Evaluation
5230 @subsection Evaluation
5231 @cindex lazy evaluation
5232 @cindex expression evaluation order
5233 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5234 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5235
5236 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5237 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5238 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5239 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5240
5241 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5242 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5243 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5244 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5245
5246 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5247 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5248 allocation.
5249
5250 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5251 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5252
5253 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5254 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5255 following
5256 @smallexample
5257 @group
5258 SECTIONS
5259 @{
5260 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5261 @{ *(.text) @}
5262 @}
5263 @end group
5264 @end smallexample
5265 @noindent
5266 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5267 address}.
5268
5269 @node Expression Section
5270 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5271 @cindex expression sections
5272 @cindex absolute expressions
5273 @cindex relative expressions
5274 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5275 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5276 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5277 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5278 or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5279 fixed offset from the base of a section.
5280
5281 The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5282 whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5283 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5284 section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5285
5286 A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5287 relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5288 further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5289 section will be the section of the relative expression.
5290
5291 A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5292 through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5293 will not have any particular associated section.
5294
5295 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5296 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5297 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5298 section @samp{.data}:
5299 @smallexample
5300 SECTIONS
5301 @{
5302 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5303 @}
5304 @end smallexample
5305 @noindent
5306 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5307 @samp{.data} section.
5308
5309 @node Builtin Functions
5310 @subsection Builtin Functions
5311 @cindex functions in expressions
5312 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5313 use in linker script expressions.
5314
5315 @table @code
5316 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5317 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5318 @cindex expression, absolute
5319 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5320 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5321 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5322 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5323
5324 @item ADDR(@var{section})
5325 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5326 @cindex section address in expression
5327 Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5328 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5329 the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5330 identical values:
5331 @smallexample
5332 @group
5333 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5334 .output1 :
5335 @{
5336 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5337 @dots{}
5338 @}
5339 .output :
5340 @{
5341 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5342 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5343 @}
5344 @dots{} @}
5345 @end group
5346 @end smallexample
5347
5348 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
5349 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5350 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5351 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5352 @cindex round up location counter
5353 @cindex align location counter
5354 @cindex round up expression
5355 @cindex align expression
5356 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5357 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5358 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5359 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5360 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5361 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5362
5363 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5364 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5365 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5366 input sections:
5367 @smallexample
5368 @group
5369 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5370 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5371 *(.data)
5372 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5373 @}
5374 @dots{} @}
5375 @end group
5376 @end smallexample
5377 @noindent
5378 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5379 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5380 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5381 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5382
5383 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5384
5385 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5386 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5387 @cindex section alignment
5388 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5389 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5390 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5391 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5392 value in that section.
5393 @smallexample
5394 @group
5395 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5396 .output @{
5397 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5398 @dots{}
5399 @}
5400 @dots{} @}
5401 @end group
5402 @end smallexample
5403
5404 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5405 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5406 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5407 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5408 section.
5409
5410 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5411 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5412 This is equivalent to either
5413 @smallexample
5414 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5415 @end smallexample
5416 or
5417 @smallexample
5418 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5419 @end smallexample
5420 @noindent
5421 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5422 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5423 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5424 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5425 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5426 bytes in the on-disk file.
5427
5428 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5429 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5430 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5431 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5432 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5433
5434 @noindent
5435 Example:
5436 @smallexample
5437 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5438 @end smallexample
5439
5440 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5441 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5442 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5443 evaluation purposes.
5444
5445 @smallexample
5446 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5447 @end smallexample
5448
5449 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5450 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5451 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5452 @samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5453 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5454 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5455 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5456 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5457 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5458 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5459
5460 @smallexample
5461 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5462 @end smallexample
5463
5464 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5465 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5466 @cindex symbol defaults
5467 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
5468 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5469 return 0. You can use this function to provide
5470 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5471 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5472 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5473 existed, its value is preserved:
5474
5475 @smallexample
5476 @group
5477 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5478 .text : @{
5479 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5480 @dots{}
5481 @}
5482 @dots{}
5483 @}
5484 @end group
5485 @end smallexample
5486
5487 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5488 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5489 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5490
5491 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5492 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5493 @cindex section load address in expression
5494 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5495 the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5496 attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5497 Section LMA}).
5498
5499 @kindex MAX
5500 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5501 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5502
5503 @kindex MIN
5504 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5505 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5506
5507 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
5508 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5509 @cindex unallocated address, next
5510 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5511 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5512 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5513 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5514
5515 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5516 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5517 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5518
5519 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5520 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5521 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5522 value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5523 option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5524 @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5525 be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5526 ``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5527 name.
5528
5529 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5530 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5531 @cindex section size
5532 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5533 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5534 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5535 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5536 @smallexample
5537 @group
5538 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5539 .output @{
5540 .start = . ;
5541 @dots{}
5542 .end = . ;
5543 @}
5544 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5545 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5546 @dots{} @}
5547 @end group
5548 @end smallexample
5549
5550 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5551 @itemx sizeof_headers
5552 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5553 @cindex header size
5554 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5555 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5556 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5557 choose, to facilitate paging.
5558
5559 @cindex not enough room for program headers
5560 @cindex program headers, not enough room
5561 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5562 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5563 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5564 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5565 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5566 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5567 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5568 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5569 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5570 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5571 @end table
5572
5573 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
5574 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
5575 @cindex implicit linker scripts
5576 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5577 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5578 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5579 linker will report an error.
5580
5581 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5582
5583 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5584 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5585 commands.
5586
5587 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5588 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5589 read. This can affect archive searching.
5590
5591 @ifset GENERIC
5592 @node Machine Dependent
5593 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
5594
5595 @cindex machine dependencies
5596 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5597 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
5598 functionality are not listed.
5599
5600 @menu
5601 @ifset H8300
5602 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5603 @end ifset
5604 @ifset I960
5605 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5606 @end ifset
5607 @ifset ARM
5608 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5609 @end ifset
5610 @ifset HPPA
5611 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5612 @end ifset
5613 @ifset M68K
5614 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5615 @end ifset
5616 @ifset MMIX
5617 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
5618 @end ifset
5619 @ifset MSP430
5620 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
5621 @end ifset
5622 @ifset M68HC11
5623 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5624 @end ifset
5625 @ifset POWERPC
5626 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5627 @end ifset
5628 @ifset POWERPC64
5629 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5630 @end ifset
5631 @ifset SPU
5632 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5633 @end ifset
5634 @ifset TICOFF
5635 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
5636 @end ifset
5637 @ifset WIN32
5638 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5639 @end ifset
5640 @ifset XTENSA
5641 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5642 @end ifset
5643 @end menu
5644 @end ifset
5645
5646 @ifset H8300
5647 @ifclear GENERIC
5648 @raisesections
5649 @end ifclear
5650
5651 @node H8/300
5652 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
5653
5654 @cindex H8/300 support
5655 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
5656 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5657
5658 @table @emph
5659 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
5660 @item relaxing address modes
5661 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5662 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5663 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5664 respectively.
5665
5666 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5667 @item synthesizing instructions
5668 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
5669 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
5670 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5671 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5672 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5673 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5674 top page of memory).
5675
5676 @item bit manipulation instructions
5677 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
5678 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
5679 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5680 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5681 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
5682 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5683 the top page of memory).
5684
5685 @item system control instructions
5686 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
5687 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5688 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5689 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
5690 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
5691 the top page of memory).
5692 @end table
5693
5694 @ifclear GENERIC
5695 @lowersections
5696 @end ifclear
5697 @end ifset
5698
5699 @ifclear GENERIC
5700 @ifset Renesas
5701 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
5702 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5703 @node Renesas
5704 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
5705
5706 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5707 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5708 options are required for these chips.
5709 @end ifset
5710 @end ifclear
5711
5712 @ifset I960
5713 @ifclear GENERIC
5714 @raisesections
5715 @end ifclear
5716
5717 @node i960
5718 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5719
5720 @cindex i960 support
5721
5722 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5723 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5724 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5725 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5726 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5727 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5728 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5729
5730 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5731 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5732 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5733 the names
5734
5735 @smallexample
5736 @group
5737 try
5738 libtry.a
5739 tryca
5740 libtryca.a
5741 @end group
5742 @end smallexample
5743
5744 @noindent
5745 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5746 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5747
5748 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5749 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5750 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5751 specifies a library.
5752
5753 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5754 @cindex relaxing on i960
5755 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5756 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5757 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5758 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5759 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5760 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5761 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5762 not itself call any subroutines).
5763
5764 @ifclear GENERIC
5765 @lowersections
5766 @end ifclear
5767 @end ifset
5768
5769 @ifset ARM
5770 @ifclear GENERIC
5771 @raisesections
5772 @end ifclear
5773
5774 @ifset M68HC11
5775 @ifclear GENERIC
5776 @raisesections
5777 @end ifclear
5778
5779 @node M68HC11/68HC12
5780 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5781
5782 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5783
5784 @subsection Linker Relaxation
5785
5786 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5787 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5788
5789 @table @emph
5790 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5791 @item relaxing address modes
5792 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5793 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5794 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5795 respectively.
5796
5797 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5798 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5799 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5800
5801 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
5802 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5803 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5804 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5805 @code{bset} instructions.
5806
5807 @end table
5808
5809 @subsection Trampoline Generation
5810
5811 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5812 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5813 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5814 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
5815 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
5816 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5817 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5818 point to the function trampoline.
5819
5820 @ifclear GENERIC
5821 @lowersections
5822 @end ifclear
5823 @end ifset
5824
5825 @node ARM
5826 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
5827
5828 @cindex ARM interworking support
5829 @kindex --support-old-code
5830 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
5831 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
5832 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5833 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5834 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5835 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5836 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5837 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5838 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5839 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5840
5841 @cindex thumb entry point
5842 @cindex entry point, thumb
5843 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5844 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5845 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5846 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5847 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5848 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5849
5850 @cindex PE import table prefixing
5851 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5852 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5853 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5854 elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5855 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5856
5857 @cindex BE8
5858 @kindex --be8
5859 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5860 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5861 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5862
5863 @cindex TARGET1
5864 @kindex --target1-rel
5865 @kindex --target1-abs
5866 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5867 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5868 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5869 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5870
5871 @cindex TARGET2
5872 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
5873 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5874 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5875 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5876 @table @samp
5877 @item rel
5878 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5879 @item abs
5880 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
5881 @item got-rel
5882 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5883 @end table
5884
5885 @cindex FIX_V4BX
5886 @kindex --fix-v4bx
5887 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5888 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5889 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5890 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5891
5892 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5893 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5894 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5895
5896 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5897 relocations are ignored.
5898
5899 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5900 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5901 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5902 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5903
5904 @smallexample
5905 TST rM, #1
5906 MOVEQ PC, rM
5907 BX Rn
5908 @end smallexample
5909
5910 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5911 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5912 condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5913
5914 @cindex USE_BLX
5915 @kindex --use-blx
5916 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5917 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5918 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5919 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5920 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5921
5922 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5923 specify it if you are using that target.
5924
5925 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5926 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5927 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5928 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5929 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5930 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5931 the support code can read the intended values.
5932
5933 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5934 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5935 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5936 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5937 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5938 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5939
5940 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5941 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5942 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5943 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5944 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5945 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5946
5947 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5948 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5949 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5950 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5951 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5952 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5953 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5954
5955 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5956 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
5957 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5958 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5959 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5960 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5961 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5962 not be diagnosed.
5963
5964 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
5965 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
5966 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5967 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5968 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5969 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
5970 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
5971
5972 @cindex PIC_VENEER
5973 @kindex --pic-veneer
5974 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5975 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5976 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5977 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5978
5979 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5980 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5981 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5982 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5983 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5984 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5985 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5986 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5987 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5988 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5989 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5990 where they should be placed.
5991
5992 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5993 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5994 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
5995 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5996 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5997 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5998 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5999 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6000 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6001 from the input sections.
6002
6003 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6004 @samp{N = +1}.
6005
6006 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6007 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6008 otherwise.
6009
6010 @ifclear GENERIC
6011 @lowersections
6012 @end ifclear
6013 @end ifset
6014
6015 @ifset HPPA
6016 @ifclear GENERIC
6017 @raisesections
6018 @end ifclear
6019
6020 @node HPPA ELF32
6021 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6022 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6023 @kindex --multi-subspace
6024 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6025 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6026 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6027 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6028 multiple sub-spaces.
6029
6030 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6031 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6032 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6033 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6034 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6035 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6036 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6037 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6038 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6039 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6040 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6041 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6042 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6043 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6044 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6045 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6046
6047 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6048 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6049 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6050 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6051
6052 @ifclear GENERIC
6053 @lowersections
6054 @end ifclear
6055 @end ifset
6056
6057 @ifset M68K
6058 @ifclear GENERIC
6059 @raisesections
6060 @end ifclear
6061
6062 @node M68K
6063 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6064
6065 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6066 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6067 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6068 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6069 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6070 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6071 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6072 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6073 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6074 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6075 support such GOTs.
6076 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6077 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6078 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6079 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6080
6081 @ifclear GENERIC
6082 @lowersections
6083 @end ifclear
6084 @end ifset
6085
6086 @ifset MMIX
6087 @ifclear GENERIC
6088 @raisesections
6089 @end ifclear
6090
6091 @node MMIX
6092 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6093 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6094 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6095 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6096 can translate between the two formats.
6097
6098 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6099 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6100 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6101 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6102 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6103 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6104 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6105 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6106
6107 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6108 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6109 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6110 of a section.
6111
6112 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6113 are left out from an mmo file.
6114
6115 @ifclear GENERIC
6116 @lowersections
6117 @end ifclear
6118 @end ifset
6119
6120 @ifset MSP430
6121 @ifclear GENERIC
6122 @raisesections
6123 @end ifclear
6124
6125 @node MSP430
6126 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6127 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6128 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6129 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6130
6131 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6132 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6133
6134 @table @code
6135 @item @samp{.vectors}
6136 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6137
6138 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6139 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6140 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6141
6142 @item @samp{.infomem}
6143 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6144 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6145
6146 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6147 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6148 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6149
6150 @item @samp{.noinit}
6151 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6152
6153 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6154 @end table
6155
6156 @ifclear GENERIC
6157 @lowersections
6158 @end ifclear
6159 @end ifset
6160
6161 @ifset POWERPC
6162 @ifclear GENERIC
6163 @raisesections
6164 @end ifclear
6165
6166 @node PowerPC ELF32
6167 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6168 @cindex PowerPC long branches
6169 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
6170 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6171 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6172 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6173 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6174 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6175 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6176 section exceeds 33M in size.
6177
6178 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6179 @table @option
6180 @cindex PowerPC PLT
6181 @kindex --bss-plt
6182 @item --bss-plt
6183 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6184 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6185 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6186 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6187 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6188 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6189 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6190 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6191
6192 @kindex --secure-plt
6193 @item --secure-plt
6194 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6195 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6196 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6197 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6198 style BSS PLT.
6199
6200 @cindex PowerPC GOT
6201 @kindex --sdata-got
6202 @item --sdata-got
6203 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6204 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6205 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6206 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6207 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6208 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6209 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6210 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6211 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6212 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6213 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6214 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6215
6216 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6217 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6218 @item --emit-stub-syms
6219 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6220 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6221
6222 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6223 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6224 @item --no-tls-optimize
6225 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6226 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6227 disable the optimization.
6228 @end table
6229
6230 @ifclear GENERIC
6231 @lowersections
6232 @end ifclear
6233 @end ifset
6234
6235 @ifset POWERPC64
6236 @ifclear GENERIC
6237 @raisesections
6238 @end ifclear
6239
6240 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
6241 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6242
6243 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6244 @table @option
6245 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6246 @kindex --stub-group-size
6247 @item --stub-group-size
6248 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6249 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6250 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6251 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6252 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6253 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6254 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6255 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6256 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6257 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6258 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6259 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6260 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6261 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6262
6263 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6264 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6265 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6266 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6267
6268 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6269 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6270 @item --emit-stub-syms
6271 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6272 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6273
6274 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6275 @kindex --dotsyms
6276 @kindex --no-dotsyms
6277 @item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6278 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6279 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6280 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6281 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6282 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6283 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6284 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6285 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6286 feature.
6287
6288 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6289 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
6290 @item --no-tls-optimize
6291 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6292 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6293 disable the optimization.
6294
6295 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6296 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
6297 @item --no-opd-optimize
6298 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6299 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
6300 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
6301 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6302
6303 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6304 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6305 @item --non-overlapping-opd
6306 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6307 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6308 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6309 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6310
6311 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6312 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
6313 @item --no-toc-optimize
6314 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6315 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6316 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6317 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6318 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6319 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6320 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6321 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6322 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6323 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6324 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6325 optimization.
6326
6327 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6328 @kindex --no-multi-toc
6329 @item --no-multi-toc
6330 By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6331 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6332 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6333 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6334 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6335 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6336 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
6337 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6338 Use this option to turn off this feature.
6339 @end table
6340
6341 @ifclear GENERIC
6342 @lowersections
6343 @end ifclear
6344 @end ifset
6345
6346 @ifset SPU
6347 @ifclear GENERIC
6348 @raisesections
6349 @end ifclear
6350
6351 @node SPU ELF
6352 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6353
6354 @cindex SPU ELF options
6355 @table @option
6356
6357 @cindex SPU plugins
6358 @kindex --plugin
6359 @item --plugin
6360 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6361
6362 @cindex SPU overlays
6363 @kindex --no-overlays
6364 @item --no-overlays
6365 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6366 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6367 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6368 turns off all this special overlay handling.
6369
6370 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6371 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
6372 @item --emit-stub-syms
6373 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6374 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6375
6376 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6377 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6378 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
6379 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6380 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6381 on calls to non-overlay regions.
6382
6383 @cindex SPU local store size
6384 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6385 @item --local-store=lo:hi
6386 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6387 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6388 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6389
6390 @cindex SPU
6391 @kindex --stack-analysis
6392 @item --stack-analysis
6393 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6394 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6395 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6396 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6397 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6398 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6399 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6400 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6401 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6402 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6403 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6404 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6405 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6406 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6407 and calls will be given.
6408
6409 @cindex SPU
6410 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
6411 @item --emit-stack-syms
6412 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6413 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6414 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6415 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6416 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6417 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6418 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
6419 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
6420 @end table
6421
6422 @ifclear GENERIC
6423 @lowersections
6424 @end ifclear
6425 @end ifset
6426
6427 @ifset TICOFF
6428 @ifclear GENERIC
6429 @raisesections
6430 @end ifclear
6431
6432 @node TI COFF
6433 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6434 @cindex TI COFF versions
6435 @kindex --format=@var{version}
6436 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6437 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6438 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6439 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6440 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6441
6442 @ifclear GENERIC
6443 @lowersections
6444 @end ifclear
6445 @end ifset
6446
6447 @ifset WIN32
6448 @ifclear GENERIC
6449 @raisesections
6450 @end ifclear
6451
6452 @node WIN32
6453 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6454
6455 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
6456 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
6457 command line options mentioned here.
6458
6459 @table @emph
6460 @cindex import libraries
6461 @item import libraries
6462 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
6463 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
6464 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6465 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
6466 support for creating such libraries provided with the
6467 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6468
6469 @item exporting DLL symbols
6470 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
6471 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6472
6473 @table @emph
6474 @item using auto-export functionality
6475 @cindex using auto-export functionality
6476 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6477 which is controlled by the following command line options:
6478
6479 @itemize
6480 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6481 @item --exclude-symbols
6482 @item --exclude-libs
6483 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
6484 @end itemize
6485
6486 If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
6487 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6488 if either of the following are true:
6489
6490 @itemize
6491 @item A DEF file is used.
6492 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6493 @end itemize
6494
6495 @item using a DEF file
6496 @cindex using a DEF file
6497 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6498 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6499 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6500 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
6501 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
6502
6503 @example
6504 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6505 @end example
6506
6507 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6508 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6509
6510 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6511
6512 @example
6513 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
6514
6515 EXPORTS
6516 foo
6517 bar
6518 _bar = bar
6519 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6520 var1 DATA
6521 @end example
6522
6523 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6524 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6525 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6526 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6527 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6528 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6529
6530 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6531 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6532 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6533
6534 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6535 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6536 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
6537 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6538
6539 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6540 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
6541 non-default base address for the image.
6542
6543 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
6544 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6545 filename specified on the command line.
6546
6547 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6548
6549 @example
6550 EXPORTS
6551 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6552 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6553 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
6554 @end example
6555
6556 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6557 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6558 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6559 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6560 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6561 @samp{<integer>} alias.
6562
6563 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6564
6565 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6566 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6567 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6568 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6569 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6570
6571 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6572 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6573 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6574 @code{*_imp__foo}).
6575
6576 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6577 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6578 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6579 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6580 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6581 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6582 application will behave unexpectedly.
6583
6584 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6585 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6586 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6587 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6588 the DLL without an import library.
6589
6590 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6591 other DEF file statements
6592
6593 @cindex creating a DEF file
6594 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6595 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
6596
6597 @item Using decorations
6598 @cindex Using decorations
6599 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6600 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6601 declared as:
6602
6603 @example
6604 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6605 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6606 @end example
6607
6608 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6609 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6610 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6611 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6612
6613 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
6614 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
6615 instead:
6616
6617 @example
6618 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6619 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6620 @end example
6621
6622 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6623 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
6624 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6625 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
6626 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
6627 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6628 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
6629 information.
6630 @end table
6631
6632 @cindex automatic data imports
6633 @item automatic data imports
6634 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
6635 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
6636 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
6637 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
6638 code to these platforms, especially for large
6639 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
6640 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
6641 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
6642 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
6643 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6644 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6645 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6646 trigger the feature's use.
6647
6648 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
6649 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6650
6651 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
6652 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6653
6654 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6655 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6656 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
6657 below.
6658
6659 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
6660 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6661 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6662 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6663 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6664 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
6665 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
6666 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
6667 references.
6668
6669 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6670 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6671 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6672 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6673 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6674 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
6675 run without error on an older system.
6676
6677 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6678 enabled as needed.
6679
6680 @cindex direct linking to a dll
6681 @item direct linking to a dll
6682 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6683 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
6684 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
6685 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
6686 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6687 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6688 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
6689 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
6690 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
6691 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6692
6693 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
6694 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
6695 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
6696 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6697 select the dll instead of an import library.
6698
6699
6700 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6701 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
6702
6703 @example
6704 libxxx.dll.a
6705 xxx.dll.a
6706 libxxx.a
6707 xxx.lib
6708 cygxxx.dll (*)
6709 libxxx.dll
6710 xxx.dll
6711 @end example
6712
6713 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6714
6715 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6716 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6717 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6718 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
6719 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6720
6721 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6722 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
6723 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6724 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6725 could coexist on the same machine.
6726
6727 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6728 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
6729 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
6730
6731 @example
6732 bin/
6733 cygxxx.dll
6734 lib/
6735 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
6736 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
6737 @end example
6738
6739 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6740 done two ways:
6741
6742 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6743 @example
6744 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
6745 @end example
6746
6747 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6748 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6749 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6750 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6751
6752 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6753 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6754 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6755 making the app/dll.
6756
6757 @example
6758 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
6759 @end example
6760
6761 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6762
6763 @example
6764 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
6765 @end example
6766
6767 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6768 perfectly legal
6769
6770 @example
6771 bin/
6772 cygxxx-5.dll
6773 lib/
6774 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
6775 @end example
6776
6777 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
6778 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6779 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6780
6781 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
6782 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
6783
6784 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6785 work with auto-imported data.
6786
6787 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6788 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6789 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6790 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6791 possible to do this without an import lib.
6792
6793 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6794 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6795 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6796 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6797
6798 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
6799 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6800 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6801 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
6802 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6803 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6804 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
6805
6806 @item symbol aliasing
6807 @table @emph
6808 @item adding additional names
6809 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
6810 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6811 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6812 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
6813 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
6814
6815 @example
6816 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6817
6818 EXPORTS
6819 foo
6820 _foo = foo
6821 @end example
6822
6823 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6824
6825 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6826 source code using the "weak" attribute:
6827
6828 @example
6829 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
6830 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
6831 @end example
6832
6833 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6834 symbols.
6835
6836 @item renaming symbols
6837 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
6838 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
6839 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6840 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
6841 created). In the following example:
6842
6843 @example
6844 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6845
6846 EXPORTS
6847 _foo = foo
6848 @end example
6849
6850 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6851 @samp{_foo}.
6852 @end table
6853
6854 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
6855 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
6856 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
6857 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6858 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6859 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6860 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6861 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6862 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6863 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
6864 which is probably not what you wanted.
6865
6866 @cindex weak externals
6867 @item weak externals
6868 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6869 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6870 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6871 are three variants of weak externals:
6872 @itemize
6873 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6874 called lazy externals.
6875 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6876 This form is not presently implemented.
6877 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6878 implemented.
6879 @end itemize
6880 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6881 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6882 uses a default value.
6883 @end table
6884
6885 @ifclear GENERIC
6886 @lowersections
6887 @end ifclear
6888 @end ifset
6889
6890 @ifset XTENSA
6891 @ifclear GENERIC
6892 @raisesections
6893 @end ifclear
6894
6895 @node Xtensa
6896 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6897
6898 @cindex Xtensa processors
6899 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6900 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6901 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6902 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6903 example, with the command:
6904
6905 @smallexample
6906 SECTIONS
6907 @{
6908 .text : @{
6909 *(.literal .text)
6910 @}
6911 @}
6912 @end smallexample
6913
6914 @noindent
6915 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6916 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6917 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6918 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6919 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6920 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6921 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
6922
6923 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
6924 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
6925 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6926 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6927 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6928 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6929 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6930 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6931 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6932 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6933 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6934 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6935
6936 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6937 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6938 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6939 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6940 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6941 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6942 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6943 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6944 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6945 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6946 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6947 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6948 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6949 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6950
6951 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6952 control the linker:
6953
6954 @cindex Xtensa options
6955 @table @option
6956 @kindex --no-relax
6957 @item --no-relax
6958 Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6959 by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6960 relaxation.
6961
6962 @item --size-opt
6963 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6964 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6965 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6966 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6967 preserve the correctness of the code.
6968 @end table
6969
6970 @ifclear GENERIC
6971 @lowersections
6972 @end ifclear
6973 @end ifset
6974
6975 @ifclear SingleFormat
6976 @node BFD
6977 @chapter BFD
6978
6979 @cindex back end
6980 @cindex object file management
6981 @cindex object formats available
6982 @kindex objdump -i
6983 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6984 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6985 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6986 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6987 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6988 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6989 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6990 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6991 list all the formats available for your configuration.
6992
6993 @cindex BFD requirements
6994 @cindex requirements for BFD
6995 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6996 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6997 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6998 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6999 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7000 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7001 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7002
7003 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7004 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7005 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7006 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7007
7008 @menu
7009 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7010 @end menu
7011
7012 @node BFD outline
7013 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
7014 @cindex opening object files
7015 @include bfdsumm.texi
7016 @end ifclear
7017
7018 @node Reporting Bugs
7019 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7020 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7021 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
7022
7023 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
7024
7025 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7026 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
7027 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
7028 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
7029 @command{ld}.
7030
7031 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7032 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7033
7034 @menu
7035 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7036 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7037 @end menu
7038
7039 @node Bug Criteria
7040 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7041 @cindex bug criteria
7042
7043 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7044
7045 @itemize @bullet
7046 @cindex fatal signal
7047 @cindex linker crash
7048 @cindex crash of linker
7049 @item
7050 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7051 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
7052
7053 @cindex error on valid input
7054 @item
7055 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7056
7057 @cindex invalid input
7058 @item
7059 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7060 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7061 object files are correct.
7062
7063 @item
7064 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
7065 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
7066 @end itemize
7067
7068 @node Bug Reporting
7069 @section How to Report Bugs
7070 @cindex bug reports
7071 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
7072
7073 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
7074 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
7075 recommend you contact that organization first.
7076
7077 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7078 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7079 distribution.
7080
7081 @ifset BUGURL
7082 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
7083 @value{BUGURL}.
7084 @end ifset
7085
7086 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7087 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7088 fact or leave it out, state it!
7089
7090 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7091 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7092 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7093 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7094 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7095 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7096 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7097 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7098 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7099 and the most helpful.
7100
7101 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7102 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7103 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7104
7105 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7106 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7107 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7108 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7109
7110 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7111
7112 @itemize @bullet
7113 @item
7114 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
7115 the @samp{--version} argument.
7116
7117 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7118 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
7119
7120 @item
7121 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
7122 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7123
7124 @item
7125 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7126 version number.
7127
7128 @item
7129 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
7130 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7131
7132 @item
7133 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7134 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7135 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7136 sufficient.
7137
7138 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7139 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7140
7141 @item
7142 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
7143 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7144 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7145 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7146 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7147 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7148 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7149 attachments are best.
7150
7151 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7152 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7153 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7154 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7155 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7156
7157 @item
7158 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7159 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7160
7161 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
7162 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7163 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7164 a chance to make a mistake.
7165
7166 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7167 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
7168 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
7169 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7170 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7171 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7172 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7173 any conclusion from our observations.
7174
7175 @item
7176 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
7177 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7178 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
7179 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
7180 context, not by line number.
7181
7182 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7183 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7184 @end itemize
7185
7186 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7187
7188 @itemize @bullet
7189 @item
7190 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7191
7192 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7193 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7194 changes will not affect it.
7195
7196 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7197 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7198 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7199 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7200
7201 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7202 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7203 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7204 less time, and so on.
7205
7206 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7207 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7208
7209 @item
7210 A patch for the bug.
7211
7212 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7213 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7214 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7215 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7216
7217 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
7218 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7219 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7220 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7221 fixed.
7222
7223 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7224 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7225 help us to understand.
7226
7227 @item
7228 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7229
7230 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7231 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7232 @end itemize
7233
7234 @node MRI
7235 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7236 @cindex MRI compatibility
7237 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7238 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
7239 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7240 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7241 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
7242 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
7243 linker commands; these commands are described here.
7244
7245 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7246 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7247 features to make use of them.
7248
7249 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7250 @samp{-c} command-line option.
7251
7252 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7253 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7254 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
7255 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
7256 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7257
7258 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7259
7260 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7261 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7262 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7263
7264 @table @code
7265 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7266 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7267 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7268 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
7269 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7270 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7271 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7272 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7273 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7274 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7275 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7276
7277 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7278 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7279 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7280 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7281
7282 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7283
7284 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7285 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7286 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7287 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
7288
7289 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7290 @item BASE @var{expression}
7291 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7292 absolute addresses) in the output file.
7293
7294 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7295 @item CHIP @var{expression}
7296 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7297 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7298
7299 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7300 @item END
7301 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7302
7303 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7304 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7305 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
7306 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
7307
7308 @enumerate
7309 @item
7310 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7311
7312 @item
7313 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7314
7315 @item
7316 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7317 @samp{COFF}
7318 @end enumerate
7319
7320 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7321 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7322 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
7323 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
7324
7325 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7326 same line, with no change in its effect.
7327
7328 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7329 @item LOAD @var{filename}
7330 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7331 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
7332 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
7333 command line.
7334
7335 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7336 @item NAME @var{output-name}
7337 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
7338 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7339 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7340
7341 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7342 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7343 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
7344 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
7345 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7346 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7347 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7348 file, in the order specified.
7349
7350 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7351 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7352 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7353 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7354 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7355 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
7356
7357 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7358 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7359 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7360 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7361 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7362 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7363 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7364 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7365 @end table
7366
7367 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7368 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7369 @include fdl.texi
7370
7371 @node LD Index
7372 @unnumbered LD Index
7373
7374 @printindex cp
7375
7376 @tex
7377 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7378 % meantime:
7379 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7380 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7381 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7382 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7383 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7384 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7385 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7386 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7387 \page\colophon
7388 % Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7389 @end tex
7390
7391 @bye
This page took 0.186968 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.